JP7652222B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a gaming machine that has a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance (Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-013496 A

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem in that it cannot provide sufficient interest to the player .

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of the game .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 comprises a first ball inlet and a second ball inlet disposed downstream of the first ball inlet in a gaming area, a path forming means for forming a path along which gaming balls that do not enter the first ball inlet and flow down can flow, a gaming board on the front side of which the gaming area is formed, and a plate-like guide member formed so as to be protruding toward the front side of the gaming board and retractable from the front side, and the path forming means comprises a receiving section for receiving gaming balls that do not enter the first ball inlet and a guide member for guiding the gaming balls that have flowed in from the receiving section out of the path. The game machine is formed from a light-transmitting material and is provided with an outlet portion through which a game ball can be received, the receiving portion being arranged upstream of the guide member, the game ball flowing down the path is guided by the guide member protruding toward the front side of the game board, and after flowing out of the outlet portion, the game ball can enter the second ball inlet, the second ball inlet being arranged toward the horizontal center of the game area than the first ball inlet when viewed from the front, and the game machine is formed so that at least a portion of a specific ball inlet area can overlap with at least a portion of the guide member below the guide member in the direction of gravity when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the entertainment value of the game can be improved .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. This is a front view of the movable ball entry device. This is a rear view of the movable ball entry device. This is an oblique view of the front of the movable ball-entering device. This is a rear oblique view of the movable ball-entering device. This is an exploded front oblique view of the movable ball-entering device. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the movable ball-entering device. FIG. FIG. 4A to 4C are partially enlarged rear views of the center frame. 4A to 4C are partially enlarged front views of the center frame. 5A is a partially enlarged front view of the center frame in a first state, and FIG. 5B is a partially enlarged front view of the center frame in a third state. 19A is a front view of the intermediate member, FIG. 19B is a rear view of the intermediate member, and FIG. 19C is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member taken along line XIXc-XIXc in FIG. 19A. FIG. 20( a ) is an exploded front perspective view of the intermediate member, and FIG. 20( b ) is an exploded rear perspective view of the intermediate member. 21(a) is a front view of the center frame and the intermediate member, (b) is a side view of the center frame and the intermediate member, and (c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the center frame and the intermediate member taken along line XXIc-XXIc in FIG. 21(a). 4A to 4C are front views of the center frame and the intermediate member. 5A to 5C are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of a center frame and an intermediate member. 4A to 4C are cross-sectional views of a center frame and an intermediate member. 25(a) is a front view of the rear member, (b) is a rear view of the rear member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rear member taken along line XXVc-XXVc in FIG. 25(a). FIG. FIG. 27(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the rear member taken along line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. 25. 1A to 1C are cross-sectional views of the rear member. 4A is a front view of the intermediate member and the rear member, and FIG. 4B is a side view of the intermediate member and the rear member. 30(a) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member taken along line XXXIa-XXXIa in FIG. 30(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb in FIG. 30(b). FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member. 1A is a front view of the rear base, and FIG. 1B is a side view of the rear base. FIG. FIG. 53A to 53C are cross-sectional views of the rear base taken along line LV-LV in FIG. 52. FIG. 4A is a front view of the variable unit, and FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a main body of the variable unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of a main body of the variable unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 4 is a top view of the variable unit. FIG. 4 is a top view of the variable unit. FIG. 4 is a top view of the variable unit. 1A to 1C are top views of the variable unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating ball portion of the variable unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating ball portion of the variable unit. 68(b) is a side view of the rotating body, (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line LXVIIIc-LXVIIIc in FIG. 68(b), and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line LXVIIId-LXVIIId in FIG. 68(b). 56(a) to (c) are schematic cross-sectional views of the displacement unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 56(a). 4A to 4C are partial top views of the displacement unit. 4A is a front view of the variable unit and the rear base, and FIG. 4B is a top view of the variable unit and the rear base. 1A to 1C are top views of the variable unit and the rear base. 72(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the variable unit and the rear base taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 72(a). 71(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the variable unit and the rear base taken along line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. 71(b). 1A is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and the rear base in a state before the stopper portion is displaced, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and the rear base in a state after the stopper portion is displaced. FIG. 2 is a top view of the variable unit and the rear base. FIG. 2 is a top view of the variable unit and the rear base. FIG. 2 is a top view of the variable unit and the rear base. 1A to 1C are cross-sectional views of the variable unit and the rear base. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and the rear base. 1A is a front view of the winning port unit, and FIG. 1B is a rear view of the winning port unit. An exploded front oblique view of the prize slot unit. An exploded rear oblique view of the prize slot unit. 1A is a front view of the variable winning device, and FIG. 1B is a top view of the variable winning device. 1A is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device, and FIG. 1B is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device. 1A is a front view of the winning port unit, and FIG. 1B is a top view of the winning port unit. 86(a) and (b) are partial front views of the prize slot unit in range LXXXVII of FIG. 86. (a) is a top view of the prize opening unit, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize opening unit taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in Figure 88(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the prize opening unit taken along line LXXXVIIIc-LXXXVIIIc in Figure 81(a). 1A to 1C are cross-sectional views of the prize slot unit. 1A to 1C are cross-sectional views of the prize slot unit. 91(a) is a front view of the variable unit in the second embodiment, (b) is a top view of the variable unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit taken along line XCIc-XCIc in FIG. 91(b). FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable unit. (a) is a front view of the magnet, (b) is a top view of the magnet, and (c) is a side view of the magnet. 1A to 1C are top views of the variable unit. 95(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 taken along line XCVIa-XCVIa in FIG. 95(a), (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit taken along line XCVIb-XCVIb in FIG. 95(b), and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit taken along line XCVIc-XCVIc in FIG. 95(c). 97(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XCVIIc-XCVIIc in FIG. 97(b); and (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XCVIId-XCVIId in FIG. 97(b). 4A and 4B are cross-sectional views of a variable unit. 99(b) is a side view of the rotating body in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a top view of the rotating body, (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line XCIXc-XCIXc in Figure 99(b), and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line XCIXd-XCIXd in Figure 99(b). FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and the rear base. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and the rear base. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and the rear base. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating body according to a fifth embodiment. 104(b) is a side view of the rotating body, (b) is a top view of the rotating body, (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line CIVc-CIVc in Figure 104(b), and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line CIVd-CIVd in Figure 104(b). FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and the rear base. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and the rear base. 13A is a front view of the winning port unit in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a rear view of the winning port unit. An exploded oblique front view of the prize slot unit. A front view of the prize winning port unit in the seventh embodiment. An exploded oblique front view of the prize slot unit. 109(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the prize slot unit taken along line CXI-CXI in FIG. An exploded oblique front view of the winning port unit in the eighth embodiment. 113(a) is a front view of the pathway member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the pathway member taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113(a). 4A is a front view of the pathway member, and FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view of the pathway member. 4A is a front view of the pathway member, and FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view of the pathway member. 4A is a front view of the pathway member, and FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view of the pathway member. A front view of the prize winning port unit in the 9th embodiment. An exploded oblique front view of the prize slot unit. 13A and 13B are front views of a pathway member. 13A and 13B are front views of a pathway member. (a) and (b) are front views of the prize slot unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the prize slot unit. 13A is a top view of a path switching member in a tenth embodiment, FIG. 13B is a front view of the path switching member, and FIG. 13C is an exploded perspective front view of the path switching member. 124(a) is a top view of the path switching member and each path, (b) is a side view of the path switching member and each path as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVb in FIG. 124(a), and (c) is a side view of the path switching member and each path as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124(a). 1A is a top view of the path switching member and each path, and FIG. 1B is a side view of the path switching member and each path. 1A is a top view of the path switching member and each path, and FIG. 1B is a side view of the path switching member and each path. 1A is a top view of the path switching member and each path, and FIG. 1B is a side view of the path switching member and each path. 1A is a top view of the path switching member and each path, and FIG. 1B is a side view of the path switching member and each path. 1A is a top view of the path switching member and each path, and FIG. 1B is a side view of the path switching member and each path. 1A is a top view of the path switching member and each path, and FIG. 1B is a side view of the path switching member and each path. A front view of the prize winning port unit in the eleventh embodiment. An exploded oblique front view of the prize slot unit. An exploded oblique rear view of the prize slot unit. 131(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the prize slot unit taken along line CXXXIV-CXXXIV in FIG. 131. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the prize opening unit. 4A and 4C are cross-sectional views of the prize opening unit. 4A is a time chart showing the change over time in the amount of displacement of a variable plate, and FIG. 4B is a time chart showing the change over time in the amount of displacement of a variable plate in the first embodiment. (a) is a side view of the rotating body, (b) is a top view of the rotating body, (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line CXXXVIIIc-CXXXVIIIc in Figure 138(b), and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line CXXXVIIId-CXXXVIIId in Figure 138(b).

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 1 to 90, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

The game board 13 (see FIG. 2), which has numerous nails and winning holes 26, 27, 28, 63, etc., is removably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the game balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a roughly box-like shape that protrudes toward the front and has an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides game balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device (not shown) or when changing the content of the super reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks due to the built-in LEDs lighting up or blinking, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating an illumination unit such as an LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 in the pachinko machine 10.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, game balls are lent out in response to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where game balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of game balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the game ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby shooting the game ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 for operating when discharging the game balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the game balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the game balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in Figure 2, the game board 13 is equipped with a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, numerous nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, two general winning holes 63, a relatively large movable ball entry device 300, a left start winning hole 26 located at the lower left of the movable ball entry device 300, a middle start winning hole 28 located in the center, and a right start winning hole 27 located at the lower right, and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from its front side.

The general winning hole 63, the left start winning hole 26, the right start winning hole 27, the center start winning hole 28, and the movable winning device 300 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

When a game ball is thrown into the game area, as it flows down, it will randomly enter the normal winning hole 63, the left start winning hole 26, the middle start winning hole 28, or the right start winning hole 27, or it will enter the movable ball winning device 300 when it is activated (open).

The game balls that enter each winning hole are collected on the back side of the game board 13 through the through holes formed in the game board 13.

Meanwhile, the game balls that flow into the movable ball entry device 300 are further sorted by flowing down, rolling, rising, etc., before being discharged and collected on the back side of the game board 13. The sorting operation within the movable ball entry device 300 will be described later with reference to another drawing.

The movable ball entry device 300 operates when a certain condition is met (for example, when a game ball enters the left start entry hole 26, the middle start entry hole 28, or the right start entry hole 27, and a predetermined special pattern is displayed in a stopped state in the form of a small win), allowing the game ball to flow in. That is, the movable ball entry device 300 has a wing portion 312 (a so-called wing member) provided at the upper position of the play area, and this wing portion 312 rotates back and forth by a predetermined angle along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a solenoid 317 (see FIG. 14).

The wing 312 is in a substantially upright state, and game balls are always prevented from entering the movable ball-entry device 300. When the movable ball-entry device 300 is activated, the wing 312 is displaced so as to fall to the left and right within the play area around its base end, allowing game balls to enter the movable ball-entry device 300. Since the wing 312 is located at an upper position within the play area, particularly near the position where the game ball is first shot, the game ball shot into the play area when the movable ball-entry device 300 is activated is guided by the nail at the upper position to easily reach the wing 312, and is guided by the wing 312 to flow into the movable ball-entry device 300.

The movable ball entry device 300 also operates when a specified condition is met (when the game ball passes through one of the specific areas provided inside the movable ball entry device 300), allowing the ball to enter the movable ball entry device 300. The specific areas inside the movable ball entry device 300 will be described in more detail below.

In addition, a variable plate 352 (see FIG. 12), which will be described later, is arranged inside the movable ball entry device 300. The variable plate 352 performs a distribution operation to guide the game ball to either the normal route or the special route. If the game ball is guided to the normal route, the probability of a subsequent jackpot is low, but if the game ball is guided to the special route, the probability of a subsequent jackpot is higher than if the game ball is guided to the normal route.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see Figure 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the balls. The game area is an area (where winning holes and the like are arranged and where the released game balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the game ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in Figure 2), which prevents the game ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in Figure 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a game ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and is bounced back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the left or right start winning hole 26 or 27 or the middle start winning hole 28. Specifically, when the ball has entered the left or right start winning hole 26 or 27, the first pattern display device 37A is activated, while when the ball has entered the middle start winning hole 28, the first pattern display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving or normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a small win, and the number of reserved balls, while the seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a big win and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (a lottery to see whether or not the game ball flowing down the movable ball entry device 300 passes through a specific area) is held when the first sensor 311b wins. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 16R jackpot, a 7R jackpot, and a 3R jackpot. In the case of a jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot is displayed on the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B.

Here, a "16R jackpot" refers to a jackpot with a maximum of 16 rounds, a "7R jackpot" refers to a jackpot with a maximum of 7 rounds, and a "3R jackpot" refers to a jackpot with a maximum of 3 rounds.

A round is a unit that divides the number of winning balls in a jackpot. In this embodiment, during one round, the wing portion 312 tilts and the first sensor 311b (see FIG. 14) is opened, and the round ends when 30 seconds have passed or when 10 game balls have passed the first sensor 311b. Since there are 10 winning balls for each game ball that passes the first sensor 311b, approximately 100 winning balls can be obtained per round.

In this embodiment, the first round ends when the game ball passes through the V-shaped winning member 382 (see FIG. 10), so there are no prize balls in the first round. That is, in a 3R jackpot, a maximum of about 200 prize balls can be won, in a 7R jackpot, a maximum of about 600 prize balls can be won, and in a 16R jackpot, a maximum of about 1500 prize balls can be won.

The time-saving state (during time-saving) refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning the jackpot remains the same, but only the probability of winning the second symbol has increased, making it easier for the gaming ball to enter the middle start winning slot 28. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in normal mode, it is a gaming state that is not in time-saving mode (a state in which the probability of winning the second symbol has not increased).

During the time-saving period, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 attached to the middle start winning hole 28 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal play. When the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is in an open state (open state), it becomes easier for the game ball to win the middle start winning hole 28 compared to when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the time-saving period, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the middle start winning hole 28, and it becomes easier to open the wing portion 312.

In addition, during the time-saving period, instead of changing the opening time of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 associated with the middle start winning port 28, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 opens in one win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the time-saving period, the probability of winning the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 associated with the middle start winning port 28 is opened and the number of times the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 opens in one win may be changed. Also, during the time-saving period, the time when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 associated with the middle start winning port 28 is opened and the number of times the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 opens in one win may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

In the play area, there are a number of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In addition, a movable ball entry device 300 is provided in the center of the play area. The movable ball entry device 300 is provided with a wing 312 that opens and closes in synchronization with the variable display in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by winning (start winning) in the left and right start winning holes 26 and 27 and the center start winning hole 28, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable second pattern in response to the passage of a game ball through the through gate 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is provided around the outer periphery of the movable ball entry device 300.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time as display symbols (second symbols (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 attached to the middle start winning hole 28 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set to be shorter during the time-saving mode than during the normal game mode. As a result, during the time-saving mode, the second symbol changes display in a short time, so more winning draws can be held than during the normal mode. This increases the chances of winning in the winning draw, giving the player more opportunities to have the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 of the middle start winning port 28 open. Therefore, during the time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the game ball to win the middle start winning port 28.

Note that if the game ball is more likely to enter the intermediate start winning hole 28 during the time-saving period by other methods, such as increasing the probability of winning or increasing the opening time or number of times the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is opened for one win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the time-saving period than during normal play, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is opened for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board on the left and right of the movable ball entry device 300, and are configured to allow some of the game balls launched onto the game board to pass through. When a game ball passes through the through gates 67, a lottery is held to determine whether a second symbol will win. After the lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the lottery results in a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol on the variable display, and if the lottery results in a miss, a "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol on the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the through gate 67 can be reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second pattern reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second pattern reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the movable ball entry device 300.

The second pattern change display may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this embodiment, or may be performed using the first pattern display device 37A, 37B and a part of the movable ball entry device 300. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be lit by a part of the movable ball entry device 300. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the game ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of through gates 67 installed is not limited to one, but may be multiple (e.g., two). In addition, the installation position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left or right of the movable ball entry device 300, and may be, for example, above the movable ball entry device 300. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern reserve lamp may not be lit.

Left and right start winning holes 26, 27 into which balls can enter are arranged on the left and right lower sides of the movable ball entry device 300. When a game ball enters one of the left and right start winning holes 26, 27, the left start winning hole switch 210a and the right start winning hole switch 210b on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on, and a lottery is held by the main control device 110 (see Figure 4) due to the left start winning hole switch 210a and the right start winning hole switch 210b being turned on, and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device 37A, and the wing portion 312 opens a predetermined number of times (once in this embodiment) and closes after a predetermined period of time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment).

On the other hand, a middle start winning hole 28 into which a ball can enter is located at the center of the left and right start winning holes 26, 27 when viewed from the front. When a game ball enters this middle start winning hole 28, a middle start winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the middle start winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device 37B, and the wing portion 312 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (twice in this embodiment) (the opening period is 0.5 seconds, and the interval between the first and second openings is 2 seconds).

Each starting winning port 26, 27, 28 has a 1 in 1 chance of winning a small win. Therefore, in this embodiment, there is no lottery for a big win when a game ball passes through each starting winning port 26, 27, 28. After the lottery, the wing 312 opens and closes a predetermined number of times after a randomly selected opening period (1 to 5 seconds).

The left and right start winning openings 26, 27 and the middle start winning opening 28 are also each one of the winning openings from which five game balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the left and right start winning openings 26, 27 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 28, but the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the left and right start winning openings 26, 27 and the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 28 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the left and right start winning openings 26, 27 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 28 may be five.

A variable winning device 650 is attached to the middle start winning opening 28. The variable plate 652 of this variable winning device 650 is configured to be able to open and close, and the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is usually in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win the middle start winning opening 28. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 67, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is in an open state (expanded state), making it easier for the ball to win the middle start winning opening 28.

As described above, during the time-saving period, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the second symbol change display, and the number of times that the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the time-saving period, the time that the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is open is also longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the time-saving period, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the game ball to win the middle start winning hole 28 than during normal play.

The probability of a 16R jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot in the event of a jackpot is set higher when a game ball enters the center start winning hole 28 than when a game ball enters the left and right start winning holes 26, 27 (this makes it easier to have multiple game balls enter the movable ball entry device 300 at once). On the other hand, the left and right start winning holes 26, 27 do not have an electric device like the center start winning hole 28, and balls are always able to enter.

The first sensor 311b is disposed on the top of the movable ball entry device 300. In the pachinko machine 10, after the game ball enters the left and right start winning holes 26, 27 or the center start winning hole 28, when a jackpot occurs due to the game ball entering the movable ball entry device 300 passing through the V winning member 382, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on to show the jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on a part of the movable ball entry device 300 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot, jackpot game) in which the ball is likely to enter. As this special game state, the wing portion 312, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls enter).

The blade 312 closes after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closing, the blade 312 is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing action of the blade 312 can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (for 16 rounds excluding the first round). The state in which this opening and closing action is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the blade 312 may be provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the blade 312 is opened for a predetermined time, and while the blade 312 is open, the ball enters the first sensor 311b, triggering the large opening provided separately from the blade 312 to open for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state that is a special game state. Also, the first sensor 311b is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be provided, and the location of the arrangement is not limited to the upper side of the movable ball entry device 300, but may be, for example, below the left and right starting entry ports 26, 27.

The right corner of the lower side of the game board 13 is provided with an attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Game balls flowing down the game area that do not win in any of the winning holes 26, 27, 28, 63 are guided through the outlet 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). All game balls shot into the game area, including game balls that have entered the movable ball entry device 300, are collected on the back side of the game board 13. The collected game balls are discharged outside the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and then merge with the supply path of the island equipment (not shown).

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it.

An example of the game of the game machine in this embodiment will be described. The object of the game in this embodiment is to pass the game ball through the V winning member 382, transition to a special game state, and obtain a prize ball. To do this, the player adjusts the strength of the game ball and shoots it so that it slides down the upper surface of the center frame 86. As a result, when the game ball hits many nails and enters each of the starting winning holes 26, 27, and 28, the wing portion 312 opens. At this time, if the game ball can be timed to enter the movable ball entry device 300, the game ball will pass through the V winning member 382 depending on the manner in which the game ball flows down afterwards, so the player can visually check the flow of the game ball and enjoy watching the movement of the actual game ball to see whether he will get a jackpot or not.

In other words, the first condition for winning a jackpot is to open the wing portion 312, and the second condition is to make the game ball enter the movable ball entry device 300 when the movable piece 190b opens.

Therefore, hitting the ball in a way that does not allow it to reach the center frame 86 (so-called "shoro hit") or hitting the ball to the return rubber 69 (so-called "right hit") is disadvantageous for winning a jackpot in this embodiment.

As described below, this embodiment employs a structure that makes it easier to win a jackpot when two game balls enter the movable ball entry device 300 at the same time. Therefore, the player shoots the game balls at the upper end of the center frame 86 (the apex of the pointed triangle), scattering the game balls to the left and right, aiming to have two balls enter the device, one on each side, when the movable piece 190b is released, thereby making it easier to play the game and win a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each function, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc., as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out game balls using a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The tank 130 is successively replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of game balls. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting the display on the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In order to instruct sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent in only one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on when the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 4) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 4) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing as a power outage processing is immediately executed.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern hold lamp, the large opening solenoid 209a for driving the opening and closing rotation to the left and right around the lower edge of the wing portion 312 of the first sensor 311b, the electric role solenoid 209b for driving the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650, or various solenoid motors 209 such as motors, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

Various direct switches 210, which are different from the various switches 208 and are directly involved in the benefits given to the player, are connected directly to the MPU 201 without going through the input/output port 205.

The various solenoid motors 209 include at least a solenoid 317 for driving the first sensor 311b to rotate left and right around the lower edge of the wing 312, a solenoid 655 for driving the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 to open and close, and a drive motor 376R for driving the rotors 372R and 372L to rotate.

The various direct switches 210 include a left start winning port switch, a right start winning port switch, and a center start winning port switch, which are not shown.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a game ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the game ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the 7-segment display performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, etc.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the various solenoid motors 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the schematic configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to Figures 5 to 7. Figure 5 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, Figure 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and Figure 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13.

As shown in Figures 5 to 7, the game board 13 mainly comprises a movable ball entry device 300 disposed inside an opening 60a in the center of a base plate 60 made of a transparent flexible resin material, a prize entry unit 600 located below the movable ball entry device 300 in the direction of gravity and disposed on the base plate 60, and an illumination unit 900 located on the back side of the base plate 60.

The movable ball-entering device 300 is inserted from the front side into the opening 60a formed through the center of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. The movable ball-entering device 300 has an edge portion with an outer shape larger than the opening 60a, and is disposed so that the edge portion abuts against the front of the base plate 60. This allows the movable ball-entering device 300 to be positioned in the front-to-rear direction relative to the base plate 60. A detailed explanation of the movable ball-entering device 300 will be given later.

The winning port unit 600 is a unit that includes the above-mentioned starting winning ports 26, 27, and 28, and is located below the movable winning device 300 in the direction of gravity and is disposed on the base plate 60. A detailed description of the winning port unit 600 will be given later.

The irradiation unit 900 is formed in a generally rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, and its outer shape is smaller than the outer shape of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. This makes it impossible for the player to directly see the irradiation unit 900 through the base plate 60.

In addition, a board (not shown) equipped with LEDs is arranged inside the irradiation unit 900, and light emitted from the LEDs is irradiated to the front side (player side). As described above, the base plate 60 is formed from a transparent flexible resin material, so that light emitted from the LEDs of the irradiation unit 900 can be irradiated to the player side through the base plate 60.

Next, the detailed configuration of the movable ball entry device 300 and the winning port unit 600 will be described with reference to Figures 8 to 90. First, the movable ball entry device 300 will be described with reference to Figures 8 to 80.

First, the overall configuration of the movable ball-entry device 300 will be described with reference to Figures 8 to 13. Figure 8 is a front view of the movable ball-entry device 300, and Figure 9 is a rear view of the movable ball-entry device 300. Figure 10 is a front perspective view of the movable ball-entry device 300, and Figure 11 is a rear perspective view of the movable ball-entry device 300. Figure 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the movable ball-entry device 300, and Figure 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the movable ball-entry device 300.

As shown in Figures 8 to 13, the movable ball-entering device 300 is mainly composed of a center frame 310 formed in a generally rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, an intermediate member 330 superimposed on the upper side of the rear side of the center frame 310 in the direction of gravity, a rear member 350 arranged on the rear side of the intermediate member 330, a variable unit 360 arranged on the rear side of the center frame 310, a rear base 390 arranged in a manner covering the rear sides of the variable unit 360 and the rear member 350, and a control board 410 arranged on the rear side of the rear base 390.

The movable ball entry device 300 allows the player to see the intermediate member 330, rear member 350, and variable unit 360 arranged on the rear side through the inside of the center frame 310 in a frame state (see Figure 8).

Next, the detailed configuration of the center frame 310 will be described with reference to Figures 14 and 15. Figure 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame 310, and Figure 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame 310.

As shown in Figures 14 and 15, the center frame 310 is mainly composed of a frame body 311 formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front, a wing portion 312 rotatably supported on the upper side of the front side of the frame body 311 in the direction of gravity, an upper front cover 313 arranged in a manner covering the front side of the frame body 311 and interposing the wing portion 312 between the frame body 311, a solenoid 317 that generates a driving force for rotating the wing portion 312, a shaft portion 315 that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 317 to the wing portion 312, a rear cover 316 that houses the solenoid 317, and a ventilation cover 318 that is provided on the rear side of the rear cover 316 to prevent the solenoid 317 from slipping out of the rear cover 316.

The frame body 311 is formed in a front-view frame state, and is mainly composed of a recess 311a recessed toward the rear side on the front side above the direction of gravity, a pair of first sensors 311b arranged on the edge of the recess 311a on the lower side in the direction of gravity, an upward inclined portion 311c formed between the pair of first sensors 311b, a downward inclined portion 311d formed on the inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity, recovery holes 311e opened at both ends of the downward inclined portion 311d to a size that allows game balls to pass through, and a through hole 311f formed through the recess 311a from the front side to the rear side.

The recess 311a is a recess for forming a gap through which the game ball can pass between the upper front cover 313 described later, and the recess dimensions are set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. The recess 311a is also formed in a crescent shape that curves downward in the direction of gravity (downward in Figure 8) as it approaches both ends in the left-right direction (left-right direction in Figure 8) when viewed from the front. This allows the game ball that has flowed down to the edge of the recess 311a to roll down along the curved shape to the outside of the frame body 311.

The upwardly inclined portion 311c is located in the left-right center of the frame body 311, and is formed on the other edge of the recess 311a (the surface connecting the front of the recess 311a and the front of the frame body 311). The upwardly inclined portion 311c is formed so as to incline downward in the direction of gravity as it moves from the center of the frame body 311 toward both left-right ends. As a result, when a game ball is thrown between the opposing recess 311a (frame body 311) and the upper front cover 313, the thrown game ball rolls on the top surface of the upwardly inclined portion 311c due to gravity, and falls from the ends of the upwardly inclined portion 311c (both left and right ends).

The first sensor 311b has a first detection hole 311b1 formed therein, which is an opening large enough for a game ball to pass through. The first sensor 311b can detect the passage of a game ball by the game ball passing through the first detection hole 311b1.

The first sensor 311b is arranged so that the first detection hole 311b1 opens in the direction of gravity on the outside of both left and right ends of the upward inclined portion 311c, and is positioned below the downward inclined end of the upward inclined portion 311c. Therefore, as described above, when a game ball rolling on the upward inclined portion 311c rolls to the end of the upward inclined portion 311c and falls from the upward inclined portion 311c, it passes through the inside of the first detection hole 311b1 of the first sensor 311b. This allows the first sensor 311b to detect a game ball sent between the opposing recess 311a and the upper front cover 313.

Through hole 311f is a hole through which rotating shaft 315a of shaft portion 315, which will be described later, is inserted, and penetrates from the front to the back of the other side of recess 311a, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of rotating shaft 315a.

The downwardly inclined portion 311d is a surface that receives a game ball sent over the top of the variable unit 360 (described later) and sends it to the recovery hole 311e when the game ball falls from the front of the variable unit 360, and is formed on the inner peripheral surface on the other side of the center frame 310. The downwardly inclined portion 311d is formed so as to incline downward in the direction of gravity as it moves outward from approximately the center position in the left-right direction. Therefore, a game ball sent to the top of the downwardly inclined portion 311d can be rolled along the inclination to the terminal position of the downwardly inclined portion 311d.

The recovery hole 311e is the hole through which the game ball sent to the descending slope portion 311d is sent next, as described above, and is formed with an opening larger than the outer diameter of the ball and is formed at both left and right ends of the descending slope portion 311d. Therefore, as described above, when the game ball rolling on the upper part of the descending slope portion 311d rolls to the end of the descending slope portion 311d and falls from the descending slope portion 311d, it is sent inside the recovery hole 311e.

The wing portion 312 is formed in a generally triangular shape when viewed from the front, and its thickness is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the wing portion 312 has a shaft support hole 312a formed on the other side of the back side (the lower side in the direction of gravity) that is recessed in a circular shape toward the front side.

The shaft support hole 312a is a hole into which the rotating shaft 315a of the shaft portion 315 described later is fitted, and is formed with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as or smaller than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 315a. As a result, when the rotating shaft 315a of the shaft portion 315 is rotated, the wing portion 312 can be rotated and displaced around the shaft support hole 312a as an axis. The operation of the wing portion 312 will be described in detail later.

The upper front cover 313 is a plate for forming a flow path for game balls on the front side of the frame body 311, and is disposed in front of the recess 311a of the frame body 311 with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball. This forms a gap through which game balls can flow between the opposing recess 311a and the upper front cover 313. In addition, the upper front cover 313 is formed from a transparent plate-like body, allowing the player to see the game balls flowing down between the opposing recess 311a and the upper front cover 313.

The upper front cover 313 is formed in a semicircular arc with one side (the upper side in the direction of gravity) curved, and has a bulge 313a that protrudes toward the rear side of one end of the cover.

The bulge 313a is a protrusion for preventing a game ball flowing down from above the upper front cover 313 in the direction of gravity from entering the gap between the recess 311a and the upper front cover 313, and is formed above the gap between the pair of wing parts 312. When the wing parts 312 are in the first state (a state in which the wing parts 312 are not rotated and the tip part A1 is located above the shaft support hole 312a in the direction of gravity), the gap between the wing parts 312 and the bulge 313a is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 cannot enter the gap between the recess 311a and the upper front cover 313 (see FIG. 17(a)).

The solenoid 317 is a driving means that applies a driving force to the blade portion 312, and is mainly formed with a shaft portion 317a that undergoes piston displacement and a transmission portion 317b that is formed below the shaft portion 317a in the direction of gravity.

The shaft 317a is formed in a cylindrical shape, and one side is inserted into the interior of the solenoid 317. The shaft direction of the shaft 317a is arranged parallel to the direction of gravity, and when power is applied to the solenoid 317, it is displaced upward in the direction of gravity and is drawn into the interior of the solenoid 317. In other words, the shaft 317a can perform piston-like motion in the direction of gravity.

Transmission section 317b is formed to protrude from the other side of shaft section 317a in a D-shape with opening 317b1 inside. Opening 317b1 of transmission section 317b is formed to open from the front side to the back side, and variable shaft 315b, which will be described later, is inserted inside. Therefore, when shaft section 317a makes a piston movement in the direction of gravity, variable shaft 315b inserted in transmission section 317b is displaced in the direction of gravity.

The shaft 315 is an axis that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 317 to the wing 312, and is mainly formed with a rotating shaft 315a arranged at one end on the front side and connected to the wing 312, a variable shaft 315b arranged at one end on the rear side and engaged with the solenoid 317, and a connecting part 315c that connects the rotating shaft 315a and the variable shaft 315b.

As described above, the rotating shaft 315a is a shaft that transmits the driving force to rotate the wing portion 312, and one end on the front side is inserted from the rear side of the through hole 311f of the frame body 311 and protrudes to the front side, and the shaft support hole 312a of the wing portion 312 is fitted onto the end protruding from the front side of the frame body 311.

As described above, the rear end of the variable shaft 315b is inserted into the transmission part 317b of the solenoid 317, and is displaced by the drive of the solenoid 317.

The connecting portion 315c is a connecting portion that connects the rotating shaft 315a and the variable shaft 315b, and connects the rear end of the rotating shaft 315a to the front end of the variable shaft 315b. The rotating shaft 315a and the variable shaft 315b are connected in a manner in which their axes are parallel. That is, the rotating shaft 315a and the variable shaft 315b are connected by the connecting portion 315c at an eccentric position. As a result, when the variable shaft 315b is displaced in the direction of gravity, the displacement is transmitted to the rotating shaft 315a by the connecting portion 315c, and the rotating shaft 315a is rotationally displaced. As a result, the wing portion 312 can be rotationally displaced.

The rear cover 316 is a plate for arranging the solenoid 317 inside, and is arranged so as to cover the rear surface of one side of the frame body 311 that is above the direction of gravity, and has a recessed portion 316a on the rear surface side for arranging the solenoid 317, and an opening 316b on the lower side of the recessed portion 316a in the direction of gravity.

The recessed portion 316a is a recess for disposing the solenoid 317 inside, and is recessed at a position facing the solenoid 317. The recessed depth of the recessed portion 316a is set to be approximately the same as the thickness dimension of the solenoid 317 in the front-to-rear direction, and is disposed at a position where the rear side of the rear cover 316 and the rear side of the solenoid 317 are approximately aligned. Therefore, by covering the rear side of the rear cover 316 with the ventilation cover 318 formed from a plate-shaped body, the solenoid 317 cannot fall off the rear cover 316.

The opening 316b is an opening for engaging the variable shaft 315b of the shaft portion 315 with the transmission portion 317b of the solenoid 317, and is formed to be larger than the displacement area of the variable shaft 315b. This allows the driving force of the solenoid 317 disposed on the rear side of the rear cover 316 to be transmitted to the shaft portion 315.

Next, the displacement operation of the wing portion 312 will be described with reference to Figures 16 and 17. (a) to (c) of Figure 16 are partially enlarged rear views of the center frame 310, and (a) to (c) of Figure 17 are partially enlarged front views of the center frame 310.

16(a) and 17(a) show the first state before the displacement of the wing portion 312, 16(c) and 17(c) show the third state after the displacement of the wing portion 312, and 16(b) and 17(b) show the second state, which is an intermediate position during the displacement from the first state to the third state. In FIG. 17, the end of the wing portion 312 opposite the shaft support hole 312a is described as the tip portion A1.

Furthermore, in Figs. 16(a) to 16(c), the ventilation cover 318 is shown in a transparent state, and in Figs. 17(a) to 17(c), the upper front cover 313 is shown in a transparent state. Also, in Figs. 16 and 17, the rotation shaft 315a is shown by a dashed line.

As shown in Figures 16(a) and 17(a), in the first state, the shaft 317a of the solenoid 317 is disposed in a state in which it protrudes downward in the direction of gravity. This causes the variable shaft 315b inserted into the opening 317b1 of the transmission part 317b to be positioned lower in the direction of gravity than the rotating shaft 315a. In this case, the tip A1 of the wing 312 that fits the rotating shaft 315a is positioned on the upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in Figure 17(a)) of the shaft support hole 312a (rotating shaft 315a) and inside the space between the opposing pair of wing parts 312.

When power is applied to the solenoid 317 from the state shown in FIG. 16(a) and FIG. 17(a) and the shaft portion 317a is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, the second state shown in FIG. 16(b) and FIG. 17(b) is reached.

As shown in Figures 16(b) and 17(b), in the second state, the shaft portion 317a is displaced upward in the direction of gravity and accommodated inside the solenoid 317, and the variable shaft 315b of the shaft portion 315 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity while rotating around the axis of the rotating shaft 315a. When the variable shaft 315b is rotationally displaced, the rotational displacement is transmitted to the rotating shaft 315a via the connecting portion 315c, causing the rotating shaft 315a to rotate. As a result, the wing portion 312 is rotationally displaced around the shaft support hole 312a.

In the second state, the tip A1 of the wing 312 is located outside the gap between the pair of opposing wings 312, and the gap between the tip A1 and the bulge 313a of the upper front cover 313 is made larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, in the second state, game balls flowing down from above in the direction of gravity can flow into the gap between the opposing recess 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover.

The second state is an intermediate position in the displacement from the first state to the third state. In other words, the displacement of the wing portion 312 is performed as a series of movements between the position of the first state described above and the position of the third state described below.

When power continues to be applied to the solenoid 317 from the state shown in FIG. 16(b) and FIG. 17(b) and the shaft portion 317a is further displaced upward in the direction of gravity, the third state shown in FIG. 16(c) and FIG. 17(c) is reached.

As shown in FIG. 16(b) and FIG. 17(b), in the third state, the shaft portion 317a is displaced further upward in the direction of gravity than in the second state described above and is housed inside the solenoid 317. As a result, the variable shaft 315b of the shaft portion 315 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity while rotating further about the axis of the rotating shaft 315a. When the variable shaft 315b is rotationally displaced, the rotational displacement of the variable shaft 315b is transmitted to the rotating shaft 315a via the connecting portion 315c, and the rotating shaft 315a is further rotated, similar to the displacement from the first state to the second state described above. Therefore, the wing portion 312 is rotationally displaced further about the shaft support hole 312a than in the second state.

In the third state, the tip A1 of the wing 312 is located outside the gap between the pair of opposing wings 312, and the imaginary line S1 connecting the tip A1 and the shaft support hole 312a (rotation shaft 315a) is inclined approximately 45 degrees outward in the left-right direction with respect to the direction of gravity. This expands the area in which the wing 312 can receive game balls flowing down above the game board 13, making it easier for game balls to flow into the gap between the opposing recess 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover 313.

Next, referring to Figure 18, we will explain the game balls flowing down the game board 13 in the first and third states. Figure 18(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the center frame 310 in the first state, and Figure 18(b) is a partially enlarged front view of the center frame 310 in the third state.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), in the first state, the gap between the tip A1 of the wing 312 and the bulge 313a of the upper front cover 313 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball cannot flow into the opposing gap between the recess 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover 313.

Therefore, the game balls flowing down from above the center frame 310 do not flow into the space between the recess 311a of the frame body 311 and the upper front cover 313, but flow down both the left and right sides of the center frame 310 (movable ball entry device 300).

On the other hand, in the third state, as described above, the imaginary line S1 connecting the tip A1 of the wing portion 312 and the shaft support hole 312a is inclined at approximately 45 degrees with respect to the direction of gravity. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18(b), game balls can flow into the gap between the recess 311a of the frame body 311 and the upper front cover 313.

Therefore, when a game ball flows down from above the center frame 310 and hits the top of the wing 312, it is sent by the wing 312 rolling between the recess 311a of the frame body 311 and the upper front cover 313.

Next, the detailed configuration of the intermediate member 330 will be described with reference to Figures 19 and 20. Figure 19(a) is a front view of the intermediate member 330, Figure 19(b) is a rear view of the intermediate member 330, and Figure 19(c) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 330 taken along line XIXc-XIXc in Figure 19(a). Figure 20(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the intermediate member 330, and Figure 20(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the intermediate member 330.

As shown in Figures 19 and 20, the intermediate member 330 is mainly formed with a main body 331 that is formed in a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a decorative base 332 that is disposed on both the outer left and right sides of the main body 331 and illuminates the inside of the main body 331.

The main body 331 is a plate for picking up the game ball sent between the recess 311a of the frame body 311 of the center frame 310 and the upper front cover 313 below the first sensor 311b in the direction of gravity and sending it to the rear side, and is mainly formed with a receiving part 331a that protrudes from approximately the center position on the front side and whose tip is located below the first detection hole 311b1 (first sensor 311b) in the direction of gravity, and a guide part 331b that is located below the receiving part 331a in the direction of gravity and guides the game ball sent from the receiving part 331a to multiple flow paths.

The main body 331 is also made of a transparent, flexible material. This allows light emitted from the decorative base 332, which is disposed on the outer left and right sides of the main body 331, to be irradiated to the inside of the main body 331.

The receiving portion 331a is formed with a generally U-shaped cross section that is open on the upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the vertical direction in FIG. 19(a)) when viewed from the front. The protruding tip on the front side of the receiving portion 331a is inserted into the opening of the frame body 311 of the center frame 310 and is positioned below the first detection hole 311b1 (first sensor 311b) of the frame body 311 in the direction of gravity. As a result, as described above, a game ball passing through the first detection hole 311b1 of the frame body 311 (center frame 310) can be dropped onto the inner surface (the inner part of the U-shape) of the receiving portion 331a.

The bottom surface of the receiving portion 331a on the lower side in the direction of gravity is formed to slope downward from the front side to the rear side (see FIG. 19(c)). This allows the game ball that falls onto the receiving portion 331a to roll along the downward slope and be sent to the rear side of the main body portion 331.

The guide portion 331b is formed to protrude from the rear side of the main body portion 331 below the receiving portion 331a in the direction of gravity (below the vertical direction in FIG. 19(b)). The guide portion 331b is formed by protruding two U-shapes, one large and one small, with the lower side open in the direction of gravity, spaced apart by a predetermined distance that is larger than the diameter of the game ball.

The inner guide portion 331b1, which is formed in a small U-shape of the guide portion 331b, has an upper surface that slopes downward from approximately the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. This allows a game ball sent to the top of the inner guide portion 331b1 to roll left-right on the upper surface of the inner guide portion 331b1.

The outer guide portion 331b2, which is formed in a large U-shape of the guide portion 331b, is formed with a gap between the inner guide portion 331b1 and the outer guide portion 331b2 that is larger than the diameter of the game ball, as described above. This allows the game ball to be guided between the opposing inner guide portion 331b1 and the outer guide portion 331b2. The game ball guided between the opposing inner guide portion 331b1 and the outer guide portion 331b2 flows down between them and is sent to the first rolling portion 381a of the main body portion 380, which will be described later.

Outside the outer guide portion 331b2 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 19(b)), a standing wall 331c protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 331 is provided extending in the direction of gravity. The standing wall 331c is formed at a distance from the outer guide portion 331b2 that is greater than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball that is sent to the upper surface of the outer guide portion 331b2 and falls from the upper surface of the outer guide portion 331b2 to be sent between the opposing outer guide portion 331b2 and the standing wall 331c, allowing it to flow down.

Next, referring to Figures 21 and 23, the sending of a game ball from the center frame 310 to the intermediate member 330 will be described. Figure 21(a) is a front view of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330, Figure 21(b) is a side view of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330, and Figure 21(c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330 taken along line XXIc-XXIc in Figure 21(a). Figures 22(a) to 22(c) are front views of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330. Figures 23(a) to 23(c) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330.

Note that Figs. 21 to 23 show the state in which the center frame 310 and intermediate member 330 are assembled. Figs. 22 and 23 also show the center frame 310 in the third state (a state in which the wing portion 312 is rotated around the pivot hole 312a), and Figs. 23(a) to 23(c) show cross sections corresponding to the cross section of Fig. 21(c). Furthermore, Figs. 22 and 23 also show the transition state in which the ball is thrown.

As shown in Figures 21(a) to 21(c), when the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330 are combined, the protruding tip of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is approximately aligned in the direction of gravity with the front of the upper front cover 313 of the center frame 310. In other words, the receiving portion 331a protrudes to a position opposite the first sensor 311b in the direction of gravity. Therefore, as described above, the game ball that passes through the inside of the first sensor 311b and flows down can be dropped onto the receiving portion 331a.

As shown in Figures 22(a) and 23(a), in the third state, the game ball flowing down from the upper side of the center frame in the direction of gravity comes into contact with the wing 312 and is sent between the two opposing wing parts 312. As a result, as shown in Figures 22(b) and 23(b), the ball is sent between the opposing recess 311a of the frame body 311 and the upper front cover 313.

As shown in Figures 22(b) and 23(b), the game ball sent between the upper front cover 313 and the recess 311a of the frame body 311 passes through the inside of the inner guide portion 331b1 of the first sensor 311b arranged on the lower edge of the recess 311a in the gravity direction, and is sent to the inside of the receiving portion 331a shown in Figures 22(c) and 23(c).

As shown in Figures 22(c) and 23(c), the curved portion of the receiving portion 331a (the curved portion that is U-shaped when viewed from the front) is positioned below the inner guide portion 331b1 of the first sensor 311b in the direction of gravity. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball that falls onto the receiving portion 331a from bouncing back. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rolling speed of the game ball rolling inside the receiving portion 331a from slowing down.

Next, referring to FIG. 24, a gaming ball rolling on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a will be described. FIG. 24(a) to FIG. 24(c) are cross-sectional views of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330. FIG. 24(a) to FIG. 24(c) show the transition state of the gaming ball rolling on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a. FIG. 24(a) to FIG. 24(c) also correspond to the cross section of FIG. 21(c).

24(a) to 24(c), the game ball sent to the upper surface of the receiving part 331a rolls on the upper surface of the receiving part 331a toward the base side (back side) due to the downward inclination toward the base side (back side). At this time, as described above, the curved part of the receiving part 331a is located on the lower side of the inner guide part 331b1 of the first sensor 311b in the direction of gravity, so the game ball flowing down from the inner guide part 331b1 can be collided with the curved part of the receiving part 331a. This allows the game ball flowing down in the direction of gravity to be displaced in the left and right directions. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the receiving part 331a can be made to roll not only toward the base of the receiving part 331a, but also in the left and right directions, which allows the player to see the rolling state of the game ball for a longer period of time, improving the player's interest.

In addition, since the curved portion has higher rigidity than a flat surface, by making the position where the game ball flows down to the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a the curved portion, it is possible to prevent the receiving portion 331a from being damaged by the impact when the game ball falls onto the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a.

Next, the rear member 350 will be described with reference to Figures 25 to 27. Figure 25(a) is a front view of the rear member 350, Figure 25(b) is a rear view of the rear member 350, and Figure 25(c) is a cross-sectional view of the rear member 350 taken along line XXVc-XXVc in Figure 25(a). Figure 26 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear member 350, and Figure 27 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear member 350.

As shown in Figures 25 to 27, the rear member 350 is mainly composed of a rear body 351 formed from a plate-like body that is approximately trapezoidal when viewed from the front, a variable plate 352 that is displaceably arranged inside an opening 351b that opens in the front-rear direction in the center of the rear body 351, a winning member 353 that is attached to the rear body 351 in a manner that sandwiches the variable plate 352 and into which a game ball is sent as the variable plate 352 is displaced, a decorative member 354 that is attached to the winning member 353 and forms a ball sending path for the game ball inside the winning member 353, a light-emitting member 355 that is attached to the decorative member 354 and irradiates light to the player side through the decorative member 354, a solenoid 356 that applies a driving force to the variable plate 352, and a cover member 357 that is attached between the decorative member 354 and the solenoid 356 and holds the solenoid 356 so that it cannot fall off.

The rear body part 351 is mainly formed with an upright part 351a that protrudes in a U-shape in cross section toward the front side, an opening 351b formed inside the upright part 351a and opening from the front to the rear, a bearing part 352f located on both the left and right sides of the opening 351b and holding the shaft part 352a of the variable plate 352 described later, a connecting hole 351c that opens from the front to the rear on the lower side of the opening 351b in the gravity direction and guides the game ball sent from the opening 351b to the rear side forward, and a first recess 351d and a second recess 351e recessed from the front to the rear at the lower end of the rear body part 351 in the gravity direction.

The rear body part 351 is a member that causes the game ball that rolls on the receiving part 331a of the intermediate member 330 (main body part 331) (that is, is sent through the intermediate member 330) to flow downward in the direction of gravity, and is attached to the intermediate member 330 with a gap between the rear side of the intermediate member 330 and the rear body part 351 that is larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to flow downward between the opposing intermediate member 330 and the rear body part 351.

The rear body 351 is also formed so that its external shape in front view is approximately the same as or smaller than that of the intermediate member 330. This prevents the member from protruding outward from the center frame 310 of the assembled movable ball entry device 300 in front view, and allows the movable ball entry device 300 to be positioned simply by inserting it from the front when attaching it to the opening 60a of the base plate 60, making it easy to attach the movable ball entry device 300 to the base plate 60.

The erected portion 351a is formed in a U-shape that is open on the bottom when viewed from the front. The erected portion 351a includes a first erected portion 351a1 having a small width dimension between the opposing portions, and a second erected portion 351a2 having a larger distance dimension between the opposing portions than the first erected portion 351a1.

The first standing portion 351a1 is arranged so that the distance between the opposing left and right sides is set to be approximately the same as the distance between the opposing left and right sides of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330, and the ends on both the left and right sides are arranged in positions facing the ends on both the left and right sides of the receiving portion 331a in the front-rear direction. In addition, the height position in the gravity direction of the upper end of the first standing portion 351a1 is set to be approximately the same as the upper end of the receiving portion 331a. This allows the game ball that is sent by rolling on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 to flow down between the opposing intermediate member 330 and the rear main body portion 351, and also to flow down inside the standing portion 351a.

The second standing portion 351a2 is formed by connecting with the end portion on the lower side in the direction of gravity of the first standing portion 352a1. The distance dimension between the opposing second standing portions 351a2 is set to be approximately the same as the longitudinal dimension of the opening 351b, and when the variable plate 352 arranged inside the opening 351b is changed, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down the longitudinal outer side of the variable plate 352. This makes it possible to reliably send the game ball flowing down between the opposing rear main body portion 351 and the intermediate member 330 to the opening 351b when the variable plate 352 is displaced.

The opening 351b is an opening for enabling a game ball flowing down between the intermediate member 330 and the rear body part 351 to be sent to the rear side of the rear body part 351, and is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, with the width dimension in the short direction set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Also, as described above, the opening 351b is formed between the left and right opposing second standing parts 351a2.

The connecting hole 351c is a hole that sends the game ball that has passed through the inside of the opening 351b and been sent to the rear side of the rear main body part to the front side via the winning member 353 described below, and is located below the opening 351b in the direction of gravity and is formed as a rectangular opening that is larger than the diameter of the ball. In addition, two connecting holes 351c are provided side by side in the left-right direction.

The first recess 351d is a path along which the game ball sent from the connecting hole 351c to the front side of the rear body part 351 is guided down by the upper surface of the inner guide part of the intermediate member 330 described above, and is located at the lower end of the rear body part 351 in the gravity direction and recessed toward the rear side.

In addition, when the rear body part 351 (rear member 350) is arranged on the intermediate member 330, the first recess 351d is formed between the inner guide part 331b1 and the outer guide part 331b2 of the intermediate member 330 in a front view. Therefore, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down between the inner guide part 331b1 and the outer guide part 331b2 can be displaced to the rear side. This makes it possible to slow down the flow speed in the direction of gravity of the game ball sent between the intermediate member 330 and the rear body part 351 when it flows down to the variable unit 360 described later. Therefore, when the game ball is sent to the variable unit 360, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing due to collision with the variable unit 360, and it is possible to stabilize the sending of the ball from the rear member 350 to the variable unit 360.

The second recess 351e is a path along which game balls flowing down between the opposing intermediate member 330 and rear member 350 are guided by the upper surface of the outer guide portion 331b2 of the intermediate member 330, and is located outside the first recess 351d in the left-right direction and recessed toward the rear side.

In addition, when the rear body part 351 (rear member 350) is arranged on the intermediate member 330, the second recess 351e is formed between the outer guide part 331b2 and the standing wall 331c of the intermediate member 330 in a front view. Therefore, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down between the outer guide part 331b2 and the standing wall 331c can be displaced to the rear side. This makes it possible to slow down the flow speed in the direction of gravity of the game ball sent between the intermediate member 330 and the rear body part 351 when it flows down to the variable unit 360 described later. Therefore, when the game ball is sent to the variable unit 360, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing due to collision with the variable unit 360, and it is possible to stabilize the sending of the ball from the rear member 359 to the variable unit 360.

As described above, the variable plate 352 is a guide member for sending the game ball flowing down between the intermediate member 330 and the rear body part 351 (rear member 350) into the opening 351b of the rear body part 351, and is arranged in a rotatable state inside the opening 351b of the rear body part 351.

The variable plate 352 is made of a transparent flexible material. The variable plate 352 is mainly composed of a plate portion 352d that is disposed inside the opening 351b of the rear body portion 351 and is formed into a plate-like body having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a shaft portion 352a that protrudes from both longitudinal ends of the plate portion 352d and is rotatably supported, a first protrusion 352b that protrudes radially outward from the shaft portion 352a and engages with the rear body portion 351 when the variable plate 352 is displaced to regulate the amount of displacement of the variable plate 352, and a second protrusion 352c that protrudes in a radially different direction from the first protrusion 352b and transmits the driving force of a solenoid 356 of a driving means described later.

The plate portion 352d is a plate-like body that rotates and displaces to guide the game ball flowing down between the intermediate member 330 and the rear body portion 351 to the opening 351b, and is formed into a horizontally elongated rectangle whose outer shape in a front view is smaller than that of the opening 351b.

The plate portion 352d also includes a front portion 352d2 that faces the intermediate member 330 before displacement, and a bulging portion 352d1 that bulges out toward the intermediate member 330 from the end opposite the rotation shaft (shaft portion 352a). A detailed description of the bulging portion 352d1 and the front portion 352d2 will be given later.

The shaft portion 352a is a shaft portion that is axially supported so that the plate portion 352d can be rotatably displaced, and is formed to protrude from one end of the plate portion 352d on the lower side in the direction of gravity at both longitudinal ends. The shaft portion 352a is disposed inside the bearing portion 351f of the rear body portion 351, and is rotatably held between the rear body portion 351 and the winning member 353, which will be described later, by disposing it from the rear side. This allows the variable plate 352 to be rotatably displaced relative to the rear body portion 351.

The first protrusions 352b are protrusions that come into contact with the rear body 351 when the variable plate 352 is rotated to regulate the amount of displacement of the variable plate 352 during rotation, and are formed to protrude radially from the shafts 352a at both left and right ends. The protruding directions of the first protrusions 352b of the shafts 352a at both ends are set to be approximately the same when viewed in the axial direction of the shafts 352a.

Furthermore, one of the first protrusions 352b (in this embodiment, the first protrusion 352b on the right side when viewed from the front) is engaged with a transmission portion 356a of a solenoid 356, which will be described later. This allows the driving force of the solenoid 356 to be transmitted to the variable plate 352. Therefore, the variable plate 352 can be rotated around the axis of the shaft portion 352a by the driving force of the solenoid 356.

In addition, a second protrusion 352c is formed on the shaft portion 352a of one of the first protrusions 352b, protruding radially from the shaft portion 352a. When viewed in the axial direction of the shaft portion 352a, the first protrusion 352b and the second protrusion 352c are formed with a predetermined gap around the axis, and the tip of the transmission portion 356a of the solenoid 356 is inserted into the gap. As a result, a driving force is applied from the solenoid 356 to displace the transmission portion 356a, causing the variable plate 352 to rotate around the axis of the shaft portion 252a. The operation of the variable plate 352 will be described in detail later.

The winning member 353 is a member that forms a path along which the game ball flows down when the variable plate 352 is displaced and sent inside the opening 351b of the rear main body part 351, and is mainly formed with a connecting hole 353a that is connected to the opening 351b of the rear main body part 351, a second detection hole 353b that opens downward on the inner edge of the connecting hole 353a, a front opening 353c that is connected at one end to the second detection hole 353b and has the other end opening to the front side, a first irregular reflection part 353d formed on the rear side, a through hole 353e through which the transmission part 356a of the solenoid 356 is inserted, and an erected wall 353f that erects from the edge of the first irregular reflection part 353d.

The connecting hole 353a is formed through the rear body 351 with an external shape substantially identical to the external shape of the opening 351b in a front view, and is formed in a position opposite the opening 351b. This allows the game ball sent to the inside of the opening 351b to be sent to the inside of the connecting hole 353a.

The second detection hole 353b is a hole formed by a sensor that detects the passage of a ball, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the ball. The second detection hole 353b is formed on the inner edge part below the gravity direction of the connecting hole 353a, and is formed to open in the gravity direction. This allows the game ball sent inside the connecting hole 353a to be sent through the second detection hole 353b, and the number of balls passing through the opening 351b can be counted by detecting the number of balls by a sensor as they pass through the second detection hole 353b.

The front opening 353c is a hole for sending the game ball sent to the second detection hole 353b into the connecting hole 351c of the rear body part 351, and one end of the opening is connected to the second detection hole 353b, and the other end is connected from the rear side to the connecting hole 351c of the rear body part 351. Therefore, the game ball sent to the inside of the opening 351b of the rear body part 351 can pass through the inside of the front opening 353c via the second detection hole 353b and be discharged from the connecting hole 351c of the rear body part 351.

The first diffuse reflection section 353d is a diffuse reflection surface that diffusely reflects the light emitted from the LED 355a of the light-emitting member 355 described below and emits it forward, and is made of a transparent flexible material and is formed with multiple uneven surfaces. By making the light emitted from the LED 355a of the light-emitting member 355 incident on the multiple uneven surfaces, the direction of travel of the light emitted from the front side of the first diffuse reflection section 353d toward the player is dispersed, allowing the first diffuse reflection section 353d to be illuminated efficiently.

The through hole 353e is an opening through which the transmission part 356a of the solenoid 356 is inserted from the rear side to the front side, and is formed as a vertically elongated rectangle larger than the outer shape of the transmission part 356a when viewed from the front, and is formed through at a position opposite the transmission part 356a of the solenoid 356.

The standing wall 353f is a wall that prevents the light emitted from the LED 355a of the light-emitting member 355 from escaping to the outside, and its standing height is set to a position where it abuts against the decorative member 354. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LED 355a toward the first diffuse reflection section 353d from escaping to the outside from the standing wall 353f.

The decorative member 354 is formed into a plate-like body that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front, and its external shape when viewed from the front is generally the same as that of the winning member 353. The decorative member 354 is mainly formed with a second irregular reflection section 354b formed on the surface facing the light-emitting member 355 described below, an opening 354a formed through the member 354 at a position facing the first irregular reflection section 353d of the winning member 353, and a through hole 354c formed through the member 354 at a position facing the transmission section 356a of the solenoid 356.

The opening 354a is an opening for directly irradiating the light emitted from the LED 355a of the light-emitting member 355 onto the first irregular reflection section 353d of the winning member 353, and is opened in a rectangular shape that is approximately the same as the external shape of the first irregular reflection section 353d when viewed from the front, and is formed in a position opposite the first irregular reflection section 353d.

The second diffuse reflection section 354b is a diffuse reflection surface that diffusely reflects the light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 arranged on the rear side and emits it forward, and is made of a transparent flexible material and has multiple projections and recesses. As a result, by making the light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 enter the multiple projections and recesses, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the front side of the second diffuse reflection section 354b is dispersed, and the second diffuse reflection section 354b can emit light efficiently.

The through hole 354c is an opening through which the transmission part 356a of the solenoid 356 is inserted from the rear side to the front side, and is formed as a vertically elongated rectangle larger than the outer shape of the transmission part 356a when viewed from the front, and is formed through at a position opposite the transmission part 356a of the solenoid 356.

The light-emitting member 355 is equipped with an LED 355a that emits light to the front side (the side facing the decorative member 354) and is attached to the rear side of the decorative member 354. This allows light to be emitted to the first diffuse reflection portion 353d and the second diffuse reflection portion 354b.

The solenoid 356 includes a transmission part 356a that transmits a driving force to the variable plate 352. As described above, the solenoid 356 is a driving means that imparts a rotational driving force to the variable plate 352, and when power is applied, the transmission part 356a is displaced in the direction of gravity.

The transmission part 356a is inserted through the through hole 353e of the winning member 353 and the through hole 354c of the decorative member 354, and is positioned between the first protrusion 352b and the second protrusion 352c of the variable plate 352. Therefore, when the transmission part 356a is displaced, the variable plate 352 rotates around the axis of the shaft part 352a.

Next, the displacement mode of the variable plate 352 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 28 and 29. Figures 28(a) to 28(c) are cross-sectional views of the rear member 350 taken along line XXVIII-XXVIII in Figure 25. Figures 29(a) to 29(c) are cross-sectional views of the rear member 350. Note that Figures 28(a) and 29(a) show the variable plate 352 in the first rotation state, Figures 28(b) and 29(b) show the variable plate 352 in the second rotation state, and Figures 28(c) and 29(c) show the variable plate 352 in the third rotation state. Also, Figures 29(a) to 29(c) correspond to the cross section of Figure 25(c).

As shown in FIG. 28(a), in the first rotation state in which the transmission part 356a of the solenoid 356 is positioned downward in the direction of gravity, the transmission part 356a abuts against one side of the second protrusion 352c of the variable plate 352, and the other side of the second protrusion 352c abuts against the rear side of the rear body part 351. In other words, the second protrusion 352c is sandwiched between the transmission part 356a and the rear body part 351. This makes it possible to prevent the variable plate 352 from wobbling around the axis of the shaft part 352a and undergoing rotational displacement.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), in the first rotation state, the variable plate 352 has the bulge 352d1 positioned above the shaft 352a in the direction of gravity, and the front surface 352d2 covers (blocks) the opening 351b of the rear body 351. In this case, the shortest distance dimension L1 between the upper end face of the opening 351b in the direction of gravity and the variable plate 352 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the ball. As a result, the game ball sent between the intermediate member 330 and the rear body 351 is not sent inside the opening 351b, but flows down in front of the variable plate 352.

In the first rotation state, the front portion 352d2 is tilted forward as it moves away from the shaft portion 352a, and the tip of the bulge portion 352d1 is positioned on the front plane of the rear body portion 351.

From the state shown in FIG. 28(a) and FIG. 29(a), power is applied to the solenoid 356, and the transmission part 356a is displaced upward in the direction of gravity. In the second rotation state shown in FIG. 28(b) and FIG. 29(b) in which the transmission part 356a is displaced by half of the total displacement, the transmission part 356a abuts against the first protrusion 352b of the variable plate 352, causing the first protrusion 352b to rotate around the axis of the shaft part 352a. This causes the variable plate 352 to rotate around the axis of the shaft part 352a.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), in the second rotation state, the variable plate 352 has the bulge 352d1 positioned on the front side relative to the shaft 352a, and the inclination angle of the front portion 352d2 tilting upward toward the front side is smaller than that in the first rotation state. In this case, the shortest distance dimension L2 between the end face of the opening 351b on the upper side in the gravity direction and the variable plate 352 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

From the state shown in FIG. 28(b) and FIG. 29(b), power continues to be applied to the solenoid 356, and the transmission part 356a is displaced upward in the direction of gravity. In the third rotation state shown in FIG. 28(c) and FIG. 29(c) where the transmission part 356a is displaced to its end, the transmission part 356a abuts against the first protrusion 352b of the variable plate 352, causing the first protrusion 352b to rotate further around the axis of the shaft part 352a. This causes the variable plate 352 to rotate further around the axis of the shaft part 352a than in the second rotation state.

As shown in FIG. 28(c), in the third rotation state, one end of the transmission part 356a and the first protrusion 352b come into contact, and the other end of the first protrusion 352b comes into contact with the intermediate member 330. That is, the first protrusion 352b is sandwiched between the rear body part 351 and the transmission part 356a. This makes it possible to prevent the variable plate 352 from wobbling around the axis of the shaft part 352a and undergoing rotational displacement.

As shown in FIG. 29(c), in the third rotation state, the variable plate 352 has the bulge 352d1 positioned on the front side relative to the shaft 352a. In this case, the shortest distance dimension L3 between the upper end face of the opening 351b in the direction of gravity and the variable plate 352 is set to be larger than the diameter of the ball. As a result, the game ball sent between the opposing intermediate member 330 and the rear main body portion 351 is sent inside the opening 351b.

In addition, in the third rotation state, the opposite surface of the front portion 352d2 is inclined upward and positioned upward as it moves away from the shaft portion 352a. Therefore, the game ball sent above the board portion 352d can be sent inside the opening 351b of the rear main body portion 351.

The distance between the first irregular reflection unit 353d and the light emitting means is therefore greater than the distance between the second irregular reflection unit 354b and the light emitting means, and the space between the variable plate 352 and the second irregular reflection unit 354b is the first flow path for the game ball, making it possible to miniaturize the unit consisting of the variable plate 352, the first irregular reflection unit 353d, and the second irregular reflection unit 354b. In other words, by making the space between the variable plate 352 and the second irregular reflection unit 354b, which are formed to change the form of light visible to the player, the first flow path for the game ball, it is possible to effectively utilize dead space and there is no need to secure a separate space for the flow path. This makes it possible to miniaturize the unit accordingly.

Next, the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 30 and 31. Figure 30(a) is a front view of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350, and Figure 30(b) is a side view of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350. Figure 31(a) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 taken along line XXXIa-XXXIa in Figure 30(a), and Figure 31(b) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb in Figure 30(b).

As shown in Figures 30 and 31, the distance dimension L4 between the LED 355a and the second irregular reflection section 354b is set to be smaller than the distance dimension L5 between the LED 355a and the first irregular reflection section 353d (L4 < L5). In addition, a variable plate 352 is disposed in the light transmission direction of the second irregular reflection section 354b.

Here, a gaming machine is known that is equipped with a displacement member (variable plate 352) that is displaceably arranged in a position visible to the player and switches the flow path of the gaming ball depending on the displacement position. In this case, a technology is also known in which the displacement member is arranged on the front side of a transparent member made of a transparent flexible material, and light is irradiated from the back of the transparent member, allowing the player to see the displacement member along with the light that has passed through the transparent member, and drawing attention to the displacement member. However, in the conventional technology described above, since the displacement member is made of a non-transparent material that does not transmit light, the area (area) of light visible to the player is reduced by the size of the displacement member, hindering the presentation effect.

In response to this, a technology was developed (not publicly known at the time of filing this application) in which the displacement member (variable plate 352) is made from a transparent flexible material, making the light that passes through the displacement member visible to the player in addition to the light that passes through the transparent member, thereby ensuring an area (area) of light that is visible to the player. However, it was found that when the displacement member is made from a transparent flexible material, there is a problem in that it is difficult for the player to identify the position of the displacement member.

In contrast, this embodiment includes a substrate member (light-emitting member 355) on which one or more light-emitting means (LEDs 355a) capable of emitting light are mounted with their light-emitting surfaces facing the front side, and a first transparent member (first diffuse reflection section 353d) and a second transparent member (second diffuse reflection section 354b) formed from a light-transmitting material and disposed on the front side of the substrate member, the displacement member is formed from a transparent flexible material and disposed on the front side of the second transparent member, and the distance between the second transparent member and the substrate member is set to a distance different from the distance between the first transparent member and the substrate member, so that the area (area) of light visible to the player is secured while the position of the displacement member can be easily identified by the player.

In other words, because the first transparent member (first diffuse reflection portion 353d) and the second transparent member (second diffuse reflection portion 354b) are at different distances from the light emitting means (LED 355a), it is possible to make the manner in which the light is diffused when passing through the first transparent member and the second transparent member different. Therefore, it is possible to make the manner in which the light that passes through the first transparent member and is visible to the player different from the manner in which the light that passes through the second transparent member and is visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to identify the position of the displacement member (variable plate 352) disposed on the front side of the second transparent member.

In addition, in a gaming machine equipped with a light-emitting member 355, a first irregular reflection section 353d and a second irregular reflection section 354b formed of a transparent flexible material on the light-emitting side of the light-emitting member 355 (LED 355a), and a variable plate 352 that guides a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to either the first ball sending path KR1 or the second ball sending path KR2, in order to make it easier for a player to recognize the variable plate 352, it was necessary to arrange a second light-emitting member and change the color of the light of the second light-emitting member or change the irradiation angle, etc., to make it easier for a player to visually recognize the position of the variable plate 352. Therefore, there was a problem that the number of parts increased and the manufacturing process became complicated because of the second light-emitting member.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the distance dimension L4 between the light emitting member 355 (LED 355a) and the second diffuse reflection section 354b is set to a different distance dimension from the distance dimension L5 between the LED 355a and the first diffuse reflection section 353d, and the variable plate 352 is disposed in front of the second diffuse reflection section 354b. This makes it possible to differentiate the form (amount) of the light emitted from the first diffuse reflection section 353d and the second diffuse reflection section 354b, thereby improving the visibility of the variable plate 352 to the player.

In other words, the farther the first diffuse reflection section 353d is placed from the light-emitting member 355, the more the light from the LEDs 355a of the light-emitting member 355 is diffused outward, and the less light is transmitted through. However, since the first diffuse reflection section 353d and the second diffuse reflection section 354b are placed at different distances from the light-emitting means, the brightness of the light transmitted through the first diffuse reflection section 353d and the second diffuse reflection section 354b can be made different between the first diffuse reflection section 353d and the second diffuse reflection section 354b. Therefore, the player can recognize the variable plate 352 placed on the light-transmitting side by the brightness of the light.

Therefore, without providing a new second light-emitting member, the light emitted from one light-emitting member 355 allows the player to recognize both the variable plate 352 and the area around the variable plate 352. As a result, there is no need to provide a new second light-emitting member, which prevents the number of parts from increasing and simplifies the manufacturing process.

Furthermore, since the first and second irregular reflection sections 353d and 354b have unevenness formed on the back side, the light emitted from the LED 355a and passing through the first and second irregular reflection sections 353d and 354b can be easily diffused by the unevenness. In this case, since the first and second irregular reflection sections 353d and 354b are at different distances from the LED 355a, the diffusion mode of the light passing through the first and second irregular reflection sections 353d and 354b can be made different. Therefore, the difference between the mode of the light that passes through the first irregular reflection section 353d and is visible to the player and the mode of the light that passes through the second irregular reflection section 354b and is visible to the player can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to identify the position of the variable plate 352 arranged on the front side of the second irregular reflection section 354b.

In addition, since the unevenness formed on the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the unevenness formed on the second irregular reflection portion 354b are substantially the same, when no light is emitted from the LED 355a, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b (the second irregular reflection portion 354b visible through the variable plate 352) can be visually recognized by the player as having the same appearance. In other words, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b have different appearances (light aspects) after the LED 355a emits light, but by having the same appearance before the LED 355a emits light, it is possible to highlight the effect in which the appearances (light aspects) of the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b are different (dissimilar).

Even if the first and second irregular reflection sections 353d and 354b have the same unevenness, the first and second irregular reflection sections 353d and 354b are at different distances from the LED 355a, so the manner in which the light is diffused when passing through the first and second irregular reflection sections 353d and 354b can be made different. In other words, the manner in which the light that passes through the first irregular reflection section 353d and is visible to the player can be made different from the manner in which the light that passes through the second irregular reflection section 354b and is visible to the player.

Furthermore, since the variable plate 352 can be positioned so as to be approximately flush with the first diffuse reflection section 353d, the variable plate 352 and the first diffuse reflection section 353d can be viewed as one body, and the area (area) of the light emitted from the LED 355a and viewed by the player can be viewed as a larger area.

In addition, a standing wall 353f is formed on the edge of the first irregular reflection section 353d of the winning member 353, standing on the decorative member 354 side, and the tip surface of the lower end side of the standing wall 353f is arranged to abut one end of the second irregular reflection section 354b of the decorative member 354. This prevents the light of the LED 355a of the light-emitting member 355 that passes through the second irregular reflection section 354b from entering the first irregular reflection section 353d, and makes it possible to increase the brightness and darkness of the light of the first irregular reflection section 353d and the second irregular reflection section 354b.

That is, by allowing the light passing through the second diffuse reflection section 354b disposed near the light emitting member 355 and heading toward the first diffuse reflection section 353d disposed farther from the light emitting member 355 to penetrate the erected wall 353f, it becomes difficult for the light to penetrate the first diffuse reflection section 353d, and the contrast between the light of the first diffuse reflection section 353d and the light of the second diffuse reflection section 354b can be made greater. Therefore, the light emitted from one light emitting means makes it easier for the player to recognize both the variable plate 352 and the surroundings of the variable plate 352.

In other words, since the vertical wall 353f that connects the first irregular reflection section 353d and the second irregular reflection section 354b is provided, the vertical wall 353ff can prevent the light that has passed through one of the first irregular reflection section 353d or the second irregular reflection section 354b (the one with the smaller distance to the LED 355a) from penetrating between the other of the first irregular reflection section 353d or the second irregular reflection section 354b (the one with the larger distance to the LED 355a) and the LED 355a. As a result, the first irregular reflection section 353d and the second irregular reflection section 354b can easily have different forms of light (particularly light and dark) that pass through them and are visible to the player. As a result, the player can easily identify the position of the displacement member disposed on the front side of the second irregular reflection section 354b.

In addition, since the back surface of the standing wall 353f is not uneven, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b (the second irregular reflection portion 354b visible through the variable plate 352) can be visually recognized by the player as having different appearances from the standing wall 353f. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the boundary between the first transparent member and the second irregular reflection portion 354b by using the standing wall 353f, thereby making it easier for the player to identify the position of the variable plate 352 disposed in front of the second irregular reflection portion 354b.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the distance between the first diffuse reflection section 353d and the LED 355a is made greater than the distance between the second diffuse reflection section 354b and the LED 355a, and the first diffuse reflection section 353d is positioned above in the direction of gravity, thereby preventing damage to the LED 355a.

That is, on the side where the distance to the LED 355a is small (narrow), the temperature in the space increases due to the heat generated by the LED 355a, increasing the risk of damage to the LED 355a. In response to this, the air whose temperature has been increased in the space on the side where the distance to the LED 355a is small (narrow) can be allowed to rise and escape to the space located above in the direction of gravity (i.e., the space on the side where the distance to the LED 355a is large (wide)). As a result, damage to the LED 355a on the side where the distance is small (narrow) can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a space is formed between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the light emitting member 355 (LED 355a) via the opening 354a of the decorative member 354. This allows heat generated by the light emitted by the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 to escape between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the LED 355a. This prevents heat from building up in the light emitting member 355. As a result, damage to the light emitting member 355 can be prevented.

That is, the first irregular reflection section 353d is set to have a larger distance dimension between the light emitting member 355 and the first irregular reflection section 353d than the second irregular reflection section 354b, so that the air between the first irregular reflection section 353d and the light emitting member 355 can be easily moved. This allows the air between the first irregular reflection section 353d and the light emitting member 355 to move, and the heat of the light emitting member 355 can be released to the outside. In addition, since the heated air tends to rise, the first irregular reflection section 353d, which has a larger distance between the light emitting member 355 and the first irregular reflection section 353d, is disposed on the upper side in the direction of gravity, so that the air heated by the light emitting member 355 can be efficiently discharged to the outside, and the light emitting member 355 can be efficiently cooled. As a result, damage to the light emitting member 355 can be suppressed.

Since the variable plate 352 has a bulge 352d1, the light passing through the variable plate 352 is shaded, and the change in the light's shadow allows the player to recognize that the variable plate 352 has been displaced.

That is, the bulge 352d1 is formed to bulge in a semicircular shape on the light transmission side, so that the direction of travel of the light emitted from the variable plate 352 can be partially changed. This reduces the amount of light emitted from the bulge 352d1 among the light that passes through the variable plate 352 and is emitted to the player side, and allows the light that passes through the variable plate to be shaded. In addition, since the bulge 352d1 is formed at the end far from the shaft 352a of the variable plate 352, the shadow of the light irradiated to the player side can be displaced as the variable plate 352 is displaced. As a result, the player can recognize the displacement of the variable plate 352 by visually checking the displacement of the shadow of the light emitted from the variable plate 352.

In other words, the variable plate 352 is formed as a plate-like body with the base end side rotatably supported on a shaft, and a bulging portion 352d1 with a larger plate thickness is formed on the tip end side, so that, among the light that passes through the variable plate 352 and is visible to the player, the light that passes through the bulging portion 352d1 and is visible to the player can be made different from the light that passes through other parts except the bulging portion 352d1 and is visible to the player. Also, as the variable plate 352 rotates around the base end side, the position of the light that passes through the tip side (bulging portion 352d1) and is visible can be displaced. In other words, by utilizing the displacement of the position of the light that passes through the tip side (bulging portion 352d1) of the variable plate 352 and is visible, the displacement (rotation) operation of the variable plate 352 can be made easier for the player to recognize.

Furthermore, since the cross section of the bulge 352d1 is curved in an arc shape, the bulge 352d1 can function as a lens (i.e., the light incident on the bulge 352d1 is refracted to diverge or converge (in this embodiment, the light incident on the bulge 352d1 is converged so that the light is perceived as a line of light with increased intensity (brightness)). This makes it possible to more clearly distinguish the difference between the light that is perceived by the player after passing through the variable plate 352 and the light that is perceived by the player after passing through the bulge 352d1 and the light that is perceived by the player after passing through the other parts excluding the bulge 352d1. As a result, the player can easily recognize the displacement (rotation) operation of the variable plate 352.

The base of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is set at a height position in the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 31(a)) that is approximately the same as the approximate center position in the direction of gravity of the variable plate 352 in the first rotation state.

The first ball sending path KR1 is connected to the third ball sending path KR3 on the inside of the second recess 351e of the rear body part 351, which is arranged on the left-right outside of the outer guide part 331b2 of the intermediate member 330. The second ball sending path KR2 is connected to the fourth ball sending path KR4 formed between the opposing inner guide part 331b1 and outer guide part 331b2 of the intermediate member 330.

Next, referring to Figures 32 to 43, we will explain the game balls sent along the first ball sending path KR1 to the fourth ball sending path KR4. Figures 32 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350.

Note that Figures 32 to 34 and Figures 38 to 40 correspond to the cross section of Figure 31(a), and Figures 35 to 37 and Figures 41 to 43 correspond to the cross section of Figure 31(b). Also, Figures 32 to 34 and Figures 35 to 37 show the transition state of the game ball being thrown along the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3, and Figures 38 to 40 and Figures 41 to 43 show the transition state of the game ball being thrown along the second ball throwing path KR2 and the fourth ball throwing path KR4.

As shown in Figures 32 and 35, when the variable plate 352 of the rear member 350 is in the first rotation state, the game ball that is sent by rolling over the upper part of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is sent to the first ball sending path KR1. In other words, the game ball that is sent by rolling over the upper part of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 flows down into the gap between the opposing intermediate member 330 and the rear main body portion 351.

From the state shown in Figures 32 and 35, the game ball flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 flows down onto the upper surface of the outer guide portion 331b2 of the intermediate member 330, and as shown in Figures 33 and 36, it rolls on the upper surface of the outer guide portion 331b2 and is sent to the third ball sending path KR3. As described above, the outer guide portion 331b2 is formed with a downward inclination as it goes from the center in the left-right direction to the outside, so that in a front view, the game ball flowing down the left side of the first ball sending path KR1 is sent to the third ball sending path KR3 on the left, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the first ball sending path KR1 is sent to the third ball sending path KR3 on the right.

The game ball sent to the third ball sending path KR3 from the state shown in Figures 33 and 36 flows down the third ball sending path KR3 and is sent to the variable unit 360 via the rear base 390 described later, as shown in Figures 34 and 37.

As shown in Figures 38 and 41, when the variable plate 352 of the rear member 350 is in the third rotation state, the game ball that is thrown by rolling over the upper part of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2. In other words, the game ball that is thrown by rolling over the upper part of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 rolls over the upper part of the variable plate 352 of the rear member 350 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

From the state shown in Figures 38 and 41, the game ball flowing down the third ball sending path KR3 passes through the inside of the second detection hole 353b of the winning member 353, and is discharged from the front opening 353c and sent to the fourth ball sending path KR4, as shown in Figures 39 and 42.

In this case, as described above, the height position of the base of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 in the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 31(a)) is set to a height position that is approximately the same as the approximate center position in the direction of gravity of the variable plate 352 in the first rotation state, so that the distance dimension in the direction of gravity between the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 can be reduced when the first ball sending path KR1 that flows down between the opposing intermediate member 330 and the rear main body part 351 and the second ball sending path KR2 that sends the ball inside the opening 351b of the rear main body part 351 are changed in the displacement state of the variable plate 352.

In other words, when the game ball rolling on the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is sorted into the first ball sending path KR1 and the second ball sending path KR2 by the variable plate 352 arranged on the rear side, the end of the variable plate 352 farther from the shaft portion 352a can be lowered than the base of the receiving portion 331a in the third state, so that the position of the variable plate 352 can be raised in the direction of gravity. As a result, the distance dimension in the direction of gravity between the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 can be reduced.

From the state shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 42, the game ball sent to the fourth ball sending path KR4 rolls on the upper surface of the inner guide portion 331b1 of the intermediate member 330 of the fourth ball sending path KR4 as shown in FIG. 40 and FIG. 43, and is sent to the ball sending section 370 described later. As described above, the inner guide portion 331b1 is formed with a downward inclination from the center in the left-right direction toward the outside, so that in a front view, a ball flowing down the left side of the second ball sending path KR2 (a ball passing through the second detection hole 353b on the left and discharged from the front opening 353c on the left) is sent to the fourth ball sending path KR4 on the left, and a ball flowing down the right side of the second ball sending path KR2 (a ball passing through the second detection hole 353b on the right and discharged from the front opening 353c on the right) is sent to the fourth ball sending path KR4 on the right.

Next, referring to Figures 44 to 51, a game ball that rolls on the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 and is sent to the first ball sending path KR1 and the second ball sending path KR2 will be described. Figures 44 and 45 are cross-sectional views of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350. Note that Figures 44 and 45 correspond to the cross section of Figure 31(a).

As shown in Figures 44 and 45, the game ball that is sent by rolling on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 rolls toward the rear side and comes into contact with the variable plate 352, and is sent to the first ball sending path KR1.

In this case, as described above, in the first rotation state, the variable plate 352 is positioned with the front portion 352d2 tilted forward as it moves away from the shaft portion 352a, so that the game ball sent from the receiving portion 331a to the first ball sending path KR1 can easily collide with the front portion 352d2 and flow downward.

In addition, the portion of the bulge 352d1 that is connected to the front portion 351d2 is positioned above the base end of the receiving portion 331a by the radius of the game ball, so that when the ball rolls vigorously around the receiving portion 331a, the ball can be caused to collide with the bulge 352d1 and flow downward. At this time, damage to the plate portion 352d can be suppressed by causing the game ball, which has gained a relatively large momentum, to collide with the bulge 352d1 that bulges out from the plate portion 352d. In other words, when the ball rolls relatively fast, the ball bulges out and collides with the highly rigid bulge 352d1, preventing damage to the plate portion 352d.

Next, referring to Figures 46 to 51, a case will be described in which the ball rolls on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 and is sent when the variable plate 352 is displaced from the first rotation state to the third rotation state. Figures 46 to 51 are cross-sectional views of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350. Note that Figures 46 to 48 and Figures 49 to 51 correspond to the cross section of Figure 31(a). Also, Figures 46 to 48 and Figures 49 to 51 show the rolling state of the game ball when the variable plate 352 is displaced from the first rotation state to the third rotation state.

As described above, if the end of the variable plate 352 farther from the shaft 352a is lower than the base of the receiving portion 331a in the third state, there is a possibility that a game ball may become caught between the base of the receiving portion 331a and the variable plate 352 during the displacement operation, causing a malfunction.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 46 and 49, the base of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is set at a height position in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in Figure 31 (a)) that is approximately the same height position as the approximate center position in the direction of gravity of the variable plate 352 in the first rotation state. Therefore, when the variable plate 352 is in the middle of displacement and the game ball is sandwiched between it and the receiving portion 331a, the abutment position between the game ball and the bulge portion 352d1 can be either the front side or the back side of the game ball divided by the virtual line S2 connecting the base end of the receiving portion 331a and the center of the game ball, and the ball can be prevented from being sandwiched between the base of the receiving portion 331a and the variable plate 352.

That is, as shown in Figures 46 to 48, when the front side of the game ball divided by the virtual line S2 comes into contact with the bulge 352d1, the connecting side of the bulge 352d1 with the front part 352d2 collides with the game ball. Therefore, by utilizing the curved surface of the bulge 352d1, the ball can be sent to the first ball sending path KR1, as shown in Figure 48.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 49 to 51, when the rear side of the game ball divided by the virtual line S2 comes into contact with the bulge 352d1, it comes into contact with the curved surface of the bulge 352d1 on the side away from the shaft 352a. This allows the game ball attempting to fall from the receiving portion 331a to be pushed back to the front side by utilizing the displacement of the variable plate 352. This allows the variable plate 352 to be displaced to the third rotation state, and the ball to be guided to the second ball sending path KR2.

Next, the rear base 390 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 52 to 54. Figure 52(a) is a front view of the rear base 390, and Figure 52(b) is a side view of the rear base 390. Figure 53 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear base 390. Figure 54 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear base 390.

As shown in Figures 52 to 54, the rear base 390 is formed mainly by a plate-like rear plate 391 arranged on the rear side, a holding member 392 arranged at one end of the rear plate 391 on the lower side in the direction of gravity and holding a solenoid 397 of the driving means between the rear plate 391 and the holding member 392, two circular members 394 fastened to both ends of the holding member 392, and a stopper portion 396 arranged on the outside between the two circular members 394.

The rear plate 391 is formed from a plate-like body that is approximately trapezoidal when viewed from the front. The rear plate 391 is a plate that covers the rear side of the rear member 350 described above, and is formed with an outer shape that is approximately the same as the outer shape of the rear member 350 when viewed from the front.

The solenoid 397 is a driving means that applies a driving force to the stopper portion 396 described below, and includes a transmission portion 397a that transmits the driving force to the stopper portion 396. The solenoid 397 is also disposed on the rear side of each of the two stopper portions 396.

The transmission part 397a is a protrusion that is displaced in the direction of gravity when power is supplied to the solenoid 397, and is inserted between the first engagement part 396a and the second engagement part 396b of the stopper part 396, which will be described later.

The holding member 392 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a recess 392a recessed on the front side at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and an opening 392b formed through the recess 392a from the front to the back.

The recess 392a is a recess into which the solenoid 397 is inserted, and is recessed into the outer shape of the solenoid 397. Therefore, by attaching the holding member 392 to the back plate 391 after inserting the solenoid 397 into the recess 392a, the solenoid 397 can be held in place so that it cannot fall off.

The opening 392b is an opening through which the transmission part 397a of the solenoid 397 is inserted forward, and is formed as a vertically elongated rectangular opening in a front view that is larger than the transmission part 397a. Therefore, when the solenoid 397 is placed inside the recess 392a, the transmission part 397a of the solenoid 397 protrudes to the front side.

The circular member 394 is a ball throwing section through which the game ball is thrown from the third ball throwing path KR3, and is formed in a generally circular shape when viewed from the side, with a shaft support hole 394a that passes through the shaft center. The shaft support hole 394a is a hole that rotatably holds the shaft B1, which will be described later, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft B1.

The shaft B1 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and one end is inserted into the shaft support hole 394a of the ring member 394 as described above, while the other end is fitted onto the shaft hole 396c of the stopper portion 396, which will be described later. Therefore, the shaft B1 can be rotated relative to the shaft support hole 394a in accordance with the rotational displacement of the stopper portion 396.

The stopper portion 396 is a ball throwing path blocking means that, by rotating and displacing, disables the ball throwing path KR6 of the variable unit 460 described later. It is formed in a roughly triangular shape when viewed from the side and is disposed outside the space between the two opposing circular members 394.

The stopper portion 396 is formed mainly with an axial hole 396c that penetrates the annular member 394 in a substantially circular shape in the axial direction, and a first engagement portion 396a and a second engagement portion 396b that protrude radially outward from the axis of the axial hole 396c.

The first engagement portion 396a is a protrusion that engages with the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 described above to transmit the driving force of the solenoid 397, and is disposed above the transmission portion 397a in the direction of gravity.

The second engagement portion 396b, like the first engagement portion 396a, is a protrusion that engages with the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 to transmit the driving force of the solenoid 397, and is disposed below the transmission member 397b in the direction of gravity.

The first engaging portion 396a and the second engaging portion 396b are formed with a predetermined gap around the axis of the shaft hole 396c, and the distance between them on the protruding tip side is set to be larger than the vertical dimension of the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397. This makes it possible to transmit a driving force to the stopper portion 396 by inserting the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 between the first engaging portion 396a and the second engaging portion 396b.

Next, the transition of the stopper portion 396 will be described with reference to Figure 55. Figures 55(a) to 55(c) are cross-sectional views of the rear base 390 taken along the line LV-LV in Figure 52. Note that Figures 55(a) to 55(c) show the transition state of the stopper portion 396. Also, in Figure 55, the end of the stopper portion 396 farther from the shaft hole 396c will be described with the reference symbol end A2.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), in the first interruption state in which the transmission part 397a of the solenoid 397 is positioned downward, the transmission part 397a abuts against the second engagement part 396b of the stopper part 396, and a driving force is applied in a direction in which the end part A2 of the stopper part 396 is displaced upward (in FIG. 55(a), the end part A2 rotates clockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 396c). This positions the end part A2 above the shaft hole 396c in the direction of gravity.

In the second cut-off state shown in FIG. 55(b), in which the transmission part 397a of the solenoid 397 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 55(a) and the transmission part 397a is displaced to the middle position of the total displacement, the transmission part 397a abuts against the first engagement part 396a of the stopper part 396, and a driving force is applied in the direction in which the end part A2 of the stopper part 396 is displaced downward (in FIG. 55(b), the end part A2 rotates left around the axis of the shaft hole 396c). This brings the end part A2 closer to the height of the shaft hole 396c in the direction of gravity than in the first cut-off state.

When the transmission part 397a of the solenoid 397 is displaced further upward from the state shown in FIG. 55(b), and the transmission part 397a is displaced to its end as shown in FIG. 55(c), a third interruption state is reached. The transmission part 397a comes into contact with the first engagement part 396a of the stopper part 396, and a driving force is applied in a direction in which the end part A2 of the stopper part 396 is displaced downward (in FIG. 55(b), the end part A2 rotates left around the axis of the shaft hole 396c). In this case, the end part A2 is displaced to a height position approximately equal to the height of the axis of the shaft hole 396c in the gravity direction.

On the other hand, when changing from the third cut-off state to the first cut-off state, the transmission part 397a of the solenoid 397 pushes the second engagement part 396b downward, so that the tip part A1 is pushed up around the axis of the shaft hole 396c.

Next, the main body 380 of the variable unit 360 will be described with reference to Figures 56 to 58. Figure 56(a) is a front view of the variable unit 360, and Figure 56(b) is a top view of the variable unit 360. Figure 57 is an exploded front oblique view of the main body 380 of the variable unit 360. Figure 58 is an exploded rear oblique view of the main body 380 of the variable unit 360.

The variable unit 360 is mainly formed with a main body section 380 having paths for sending the game balls sent from the third ball sending path KR3 and the fourth ball sending path KR4 to the front side, and a ball sending section 370 for adsorbing the game ball to a rotating body and sending the game ball.

The main body 380 is positioned on the rear surface of one side of the center frame 310 below the direction of gravity, and is visible to the player through the central opening of the center frame 310 (see Figure 8). The main body 380 is mainly formed with an upper surface base 381 on whose upper surface the rolling surface of the game ball is formed, a first lower surface base 383 arranged opposite the upper surface base 381, a V winning member 382 whose one end is journaled between the upper surface base 381 and the first lower surface base 383 and arranged so as to be displaceable, a first drive motor M1 that applies a driving force to the V winning member 382, a first transmission means 384 that transmits the driving force of the first drive motor M1 to the V winning member 382, a distribution section 389 that is rotatably arranged on the main body 380, a second drive motor M2 that applies a driving force to the distribution section 389, and a second transmission means 387 that transmits the driving force of the second drive motor M2 to the distribution section 389.

As described above, the upper surface base 381 is a plate member having a rolling surface along which the game balls are thrown from the third ball throwing path KR3 and the fourth ball throwing path KR4, and is formed from a plate-shaped body that is approximately rectangular when viewed from above. The upper base 381 is mainly formed with two first rolling parts 381a recessed from the back side to the front side, an erected part 381b erected to surround the back side of the first rolling part 381a, a second rolling part 381c branched off from the center of the front-rear direction of the rolling part 381a and recessed, a third rolling part 381d formed on the front side of the second rolling part 381c at a position sandwiching the rotors 372R and 372L, a fourth rolling part 381e formed adjacent to the third rolling part 381d and connected to the first rolling part 381a, and a shaft support hole 381f opened in the dynamic gravity direction at a position sandwiching the first rolling part 381a on the base side of the second rolling part 381c.

The first rolling portion 381a is a path along which the game ball is thrown on the fourth ball throwing path KR4, and is formed with a downward incline from the rear end where the game ball is thrown from the fourth ball throwing path KR4 toward the front side. This forms a fifth ball throwing path KR5 that throws the game ball on the fourth ball throwing path KR4 to the front side.

As described above, the fourth ball throwing path KR4 is divided into two in the left-right direction, and the first rolling portion 381a is formed below the two fourth ball throwing paths KR4 in the direction of gravity. This connects each fourth ball throwing path KR4 to each fifth ball throwing path KR5.

The two first rolling parts 381a each extend toward the front side and merge just before connecting with the fourth rolling part 381e to form one rolling surface.

The erected portion 381b is a wall that guides the game ball sent from the fourth ball sending path KR4 to the first rolling portion 381a, and the erected tip portion (the upper end portion in the direction of gravity) is arranged to abut against the guide portion 330b of the intermediate member 330 described above. This allows the game ball flowing down the fourth ball sending path KR4 to be reliably sent to the fifth ball sending path KR5 of the first rolling portion 381a.

The second rolling portion 381c is a surface that extends from the approximate center position of the first rolling portion 381a, which extends from the rear side to the front side, to the outside of the upper surface base 381, and is formed lower than the first rolling portion 381a and is formed with a downward inclination as it approaches the outside of the upper surface base 381. Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the upper part of the first rolling portion 381a and is sent to the front side can be made to collide with the distribution portion 389 described later and sent to the second rolling portion 381c.

In addition, as described above, the second rolling portion 381c is formed with a downward inclination as it moves outward in the left-right direction, so that the game ball sent to the second rolling portion 381c rolls in a direction away from the first rolling portion 381a. That is, the second rolling portion 381c forms the sixth ball sending path KR6 along which the ball is sent.

The second rolling portion 381c is formed with a concave shape at the center position in the direction perpendicular to the extension direction, making it difficult for the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c to swing. This makes it possible to stabilize the game ball sent along the sixth ball sending path KR6.

The third rolling portion 381d is a surface that receives the game ball sent by the rotating bodies 372R, 372L described below, and is formed next to the rotating bodies 372R, 372L and is formed with a downward inclination toward the fourth rolling portion 381e (front side). Therefore, the game ball sent from the rotating bodies 372R, 372L to the upper surface of the third rolling portion 381d rolls on the upper surface of the third rolling portion 381d and is sent to the fourth rolling portion 381e. In other words, the third rolling portion 381d forms a seventh ball sending path KR7 that sends the game ball to the fourth rolling portion 381e.

The fourth rolling portion 381e is an inclined surface for causing the game ball rolling on the third rolling portion 381d and the first rolling portion 381a to fall to the front side, and is formed at a position lower in the direction of gravity than the third rolling portion 381d and the first rolling portion 381a, and is formed with a downward inclination toward the front side. This allows the game ball sent from the third rolling portion 381d and the first rolling portion 381a to roll smoothly onto the upper surface of the fourth rolling portion 381e, and to roll to the front side of the fourth rolling portion 381e. In other words, the fourth rolling portion 381e forms an eighth ball sending path KR8 that causes the game ball sent from the first rolling portion 381a and the third rolling portion 381d to flow down to the front side of the main body portion 380.

The shaft support hole 381f is formed penetrating in the direction of gravity at the midpoint between the two second rolling parts 381c formed on both sides of the main body part 380.

The V-winning member 382 is a ball receiving section that sends a portion of the game ball sent from the fourth rolling section 381e of the upper base 381 to the front side into the V-winning member 382, and is formed in a box shape that is open on the side of the upper base 381 located above. The V-winning member 382 is mainly formed with an axis section 382c formed to protrude downward in the direction of gravity, and a curved section 382b that protrudes in a semicircular shape centered on the axis section 382c.

The shaft portion 382c is a shaft portion that is connected to a part of the transmission means that transmits the driving force from the first drive motor M1, and is formed to protrude downward in the direction of gravity from the bottom surface of the V-winning member 382, which is formed in a substantially box shape. Therefore, when the driving force is applied from the first drive motor M1, the V-winning member 382 can rotate around the shaft portion 382c.

The curved portion 382b is a protrusion that prevents a gap from being formed on the front side of the main body 380 when the V-winning member 382 rotates around the shaft portion 382c, and is formed to protrude in a circle centered on the axis of the shaft portion 382c on both circumferential sides of the V-winning member 382.

The first lower surface base 383 is disposed on the lower surface of the upper surface base 381 and has a recess 383a in which a portion of the front side is recessed downward in the direction of gravity.

The recess 383a is a recess that forms an opening for allowing the V winning member 382 to protrude from between the upper surface base 381 and the first lower surface base 383, and is set to a recess depth greater than the height dimension of the V winning member 382 in the direction of gravity. This allows a portion of the V winning member 382 to protrude through the recess 383a when the V winning member 382 is placed between the opposing upper surface base 381 and the first lower surface base 383.

The first transmission means 384 is formed of a first gear 384a connected to the first drive motor M1 and a second gear 384b connected to the shaft support hole 381f of the V winning member 382. The first transmission means 384 is covered and held by a cover plate 385 arranged opposite the first lower base 383.

The first gear 384a is formed in a circular shape, and has gear teeth 384a1 engraved on its outer circumferential surface. The second gear 384b is formed in a generally fan-shaped shape when viewed from above. The second gear 384b has gear teeth 384b1 engraved on its outer circumferential surface that mesh with the first gear 384a, and has a through hole 384b2 formed on the axial side of the gear teeth 384b1 that penetrates in the direction of gravity.

The through hole 384b2 is a hole that fits onto the shaft portion 382c of the V winning member 382, and is formed with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as or smaller than the diameter of the shaft portion 382c. Therefore, when the first drive motor M1 rotates, the driving force is transmitted from the first gear 384a to the second gear 384b, and the shaft portion 382c that fits onto the shaft portion 382c of the second gear 384b rotates, causing the V winning member 382 to rotate.

The distribution section 389 is formed mainly by a shaft section 389a that can be inserted into the shaft support hole 381f of the upper surface base 381, and a path switching section 390b that bulges outward in a fan shape in the radial direction from the base of the shaft section 389a. The distribution section 389 is also disposed between the two second rolling sections 381c.

When the distribution unit 389 is displaced, a portion of the path switching unit 390b that bulges out in a fan shape is positioned on the fifth ball sending path KR5. This allows the game ball sent on the fifth ball sending path KR5 to be sent to the second rolling unit 381c. A detailed explanation of the distribution unit 389 will be given later.

The tip of the shaft 389a is inserted into the shaft support hole 381f of the upper base 381 and is connected to a part of the second transmission means 387. As a result, when a driving force is applied to the second drive motor M2, the shaft 389a is rotated via the transmission means 387.

The second transmission means 387 is formed of a first gear 387a connected to the second drive motor M2 and a second gear 387b connected to the shaft portion 389a of the distribution unit 389. The second transmission means 387 is covered and held by a second lower surface base 388 disposed opposite the upper surface base 381.

The first gear 387a is formed in a circular shape, and has gear teeth engraved on its outer circumferential surface. The second gear 387b is formed in a roughly fan-like shape when viewed from above. The second gear 387b has gear teeth 387b1 engraved on its outer circumferential surface that mesh with the first gear 387a, and has a through hole 387b2 that penetrates in the direction of gravity.

Through hole 387b2 is a hole that fits onto shaft portion 389a of distribution portion 389, and is formed with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the diameter of shaft portion 389a or smaller than the diameter of shaft portion 389a. Therefore, when second drive motor M2 rotates, the driving force is transmitted from first gear 387a to second gear 387b, and shaft portion 389a that fits onto shaft portion 389a of second gear 387b rotates, causing distribution portion 389 to rotate.

Next, the operation of the distribution unit 389 will be described with reference to Fig. 59 to Fig. 61. Fig. 59 to Fig. 61 are top views of the distribution unit 389. Note that in Fig. 59 to Fig. 61, the second transmission means 387 is illustrated by a dashed line. Also, Fig. 59 illustrates a state in which the distribution unit 389 has been rotated leftward around the shaft portion 389a, with Fig. 60 being the initial position, and Fig. 61 illustrates a state in which the distribution unit 389 has been rotated rightward around the shaft portion 389a, with Fig. 60 being the initial position.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the gear teeth 387b1 of the second gear 387b mesh with the gear teeth of the first gear 387a at approximately the center position, the path switching section 389b of the distribution section 389 is in a symmetrical state with respect to the center line in the left-right direction.

Next, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the initial position to the second transmission means 387, and as shown in FIG. 59, when the distribution unit 389 is rotated to the left as viewed from above around the shaft portion 389a, the path switching unit 389b is positioned to the right as viewed from the front.

In this case, the distance between the left end of the path switching unit 389b and the left end of the left fifth ball throwing path KR5 is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, a game ball thrown on the left fifth ball throwing path KR5 cannot pass through the fifth ball throwing path KR5 and is thrown to the sixth ball throwing path KR6. On the other hand, the distance between the right end of the distribution unit 389 and the right end of the right fifth ball throwing path KR5 is made larger than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, a game ball thrown on the right fifth ball throwing path KR5 is not thrown to the sixth ball throwing path KR6 but is thrown to the fifth ball throwing path KR5 and then to the eighth ball throwing path KR8.

In the state shown in Figure 61 (rotated in the opposite direction to Figure 59), the path switching unit 389b is located on the left side when viewed from the front.

In this case, the distance between the right end of the path switching unit 389b and the right end of the right-side fifth ball throwing path KR5 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, a game ball thrown on the right-side fifth ball throwing path KR5 cannot pass through the fifth ball throwing path KR5 and is thrown to the sixth ball throwing path KR6. On the other hand, the distance between the left end of the distribution unit 389 and the left end of the left-side fifth ball throwing path KR5 is made larger than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, a game ball thrown on the left-side fifth ball throwing path KR5 is not thrown to the sixth ball throwing path KR6 but is thrown to the fifth ball throwing path KR5 and then to the eighth ball throwing path KR8.

Next, referring to Figures 62 to 64, we will explain the game ball flowing down the fifth ball sending path KR5 when the distribution unit 389 is rotated leftward as viewed from above around the axis 389a.

Figures 62 to 64 are top views of the variable unit 360. Note that Figures 62 to 64 show the transition state of the game ball flowing down.

As shown in Figures 62 to 64, when the distribution unit 389 is rotated to the left when viewed from above around the axis 389a, when a game ball is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR5, the game ball passing through one of the fifth ball throwing paths (the fifth ball throwing path KR5 on the right side in Figures 62 to 64) is thrown to the eighth ball throwing path KR8 without interfering with the path switching unit 389b.

On the other hand, a game ball passing through the other fifth ball throwing path KR5 (the fifth ball throwing path KR5 on the left side in Figures 62 to 64) interferes with the path switching unit 389b and is thrown to the sixth ball throwing path KR6.

In other words, in this embodiment, the path along which the balls flow can be switched by rotating and displacing the distribution unit 389, allowing the player to see the paths along which multiple game balls flow, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Next, the actuation of the V winning member 382 will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65(a) to FIG. 65(c) are top views of the variable unit 360. Note that in FIG. 65(a) to FIG. 65(c), the first transmission means 384 is illustrated by a dashed line. FIG. 65(a) illustrates the state in which the V winning member 382 has been rotated rightward around the shaft portion 382c, with FIG. 65(b) being the initial position, and FIG. 65(c) illustrates the state in which the V winning member 382 has been rotated leftward around the shaft portion 382c, with FIG. 65(b) being the initial position.

As shown in Figures 65(a) to 65(c), when the driving force of the first drive motor M1 is transmitted to the V-winning member 382 by the first transmission means 384, its tip rotates around the shaft portion 382c and is displaced left and right.

This allows the position at which the game ball falling from the eighth ball sending path KR8 to the front side (from Figure 65 (a) to the lower side of Figure 65 (c)) enters the inside of the V winning member 382 to be irregular, allowing the player to maintain a sense of anticipation until the very end as to whether or not the ball will enter the inside of the V winning member 382, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Next, the rotating ball portion 370 of the variable unit 360 will be described with reference to Figures 66 and 67. Figure 66 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating ball portion 370 of the variable unit 360, and Figure 67 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating ball portion 370 of the variable unit 360.

The rotating ball section 370 is divided and arranged on both the left and right sides of the main body section 380, and is mainly composed of a rod-shaped connecting rod 371 that connects the rotating ball section 370 divided on both sides by inserting it into the main body section 380, a left rotating ball section 370L arranged on one axial end side of the connecting rod 371 (left side in the left-right direction with respect to the main body section), and a right rotating ball section 370R arranged on the other axial end side of the connecting rod 371 (right side in the left-right direction with respect to the main body section 380).

The right side rotation transfer ball section 370R and the left side rotation transfer ball section 370L are different in that the drive means and the transmission means for transmitting the drive are disposed in the right side rotation transfer ball section 370R, and the rest of the shape is formed symmetrically with respect to the axis of a straight line in the direction of gravity, so a detailed description of the left side rotation transfer ball section 370L is omitted. Also, the configuration of the left side rotation transfer ball section 370L is illustrated with the symbol R given to the configuration of the right side rotation transfer ball section 370R changed to L.

The right-side rotating ball section 370R is mainly composed of a rotor 372R that is connected to the other axial end of the connecting rod 371 and can rotate around the axis of the connecting rod 371, a drive motor 376R that is a drive means that applies a driving force to the rotor 372R, a transmission means 377R that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 376R to the rotor, an inner cover 373R to which the drive motor 376R is attached, and an outer cover 374R that is disposed opposite the inner cover 373R and holds the transmission means 377R between them so that it cannot fall off.

The rotating body 372R is formed with a first rotating body 372Ra arranged on the main body 380 side, a second rotating body 372Rc connected to the first rotating body 372Ra, and a magnet 372Rb having magnetic force arranged inside the second rotating body 372Rc.

The first rotating body 372Ra is a cylindrical rotating body that rotates while connected to the connecting rod 371, and has a through hole 372Ra1 that opens to the shaft. The through hole 372Ra1 is an opening into which the other end of the connecting rod 371 fits, and is formed with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as or smaller than the outer diameter of the connecting rod 371. Thus, the first rotating body 372Ra is connected by fitting the connecting rod 371 onto its outside.

The second rotating body 372Rc is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer shape that is approximately the same as the outer shape of the first rotating body 372Ra, and is disposed coaxially with and attached to the first rotating body 372Ra.

The second rotating body 372Rc is a part that attracts and sends game balls to its outer peripheral surface, and is formed with a recess 372Rc1 into which a magnet 372Rb (described later) is inserted, and a groove 372Rc2 recessed into the outer peripheral surface radially outside the recess 372Rc1.

The recess 372Rc1 is recessed into the surface of the second rotating body 372Rc that is attached to the first rotating body 372Ra, and is formed with an internal shape that is approximately the same as the external shape of the magnet 372Rb. Therefore, the rotating body 372R is assembled with the magnet 372Rb disposed inside by inserting the magnet 372Rb into the recess 372Rc1 of the second rotating body 372Rc and then attaching the second rotating body 372Rc to the first rotating body 372Ra.

The magnet 372Rb is formed in a disk shape and is inserted into the recess 372Rc1 of the second rotor 372Rc with the flat surface facing radially outward.

Transmission means 377R is a gear train that transmits the driving force of drive motor 376R to rotating body 372R, and is composed of transmission gears 377Ra to 377Rc. The leading transmission gear 377Ra is connected to drive motor 376R, and the trailing transmission gear 377Rc is connected to second rotating body Rc2. Therefore, when drive motor 376R rotates, the driving force is transmitted from transmission gear 377Ra to transmission gear 377Rc, causing rotation of rotating body 372R.

As described above, the rotating body 372R is connected to the connecting rod 371, and the rotating body 372L of the left rotating ball section 370L is also connected to one end of the connecting rod 371. This allows the rotating bodies 372R and 372L to rotate in sync.

The inner cover 373R is a plate that has an opening for collecting game balls rolling around the main body 380 and also arranges the transmission means 377R of the right-side ball transfer section 370R, and is mainly formed with a collection hole 373Ra that penetrates the first rotating body 372Ra in the axial direction, a guide wall 373Rb that protrudes from the edge of the collection hole 373Ra to the outside in the axial direction of the first rotating body 372Ra, a first opening 373Rc that opens on the axis of the second rotating body 372Rc and the transmission gear 377Rc, and a second opening 373Rd that opens on the axis of the drive motor 376R.

The recovery hole 373Ra is an opening through which the game ball passing through the fifth ball sending path KR5 passes, and is formed on the end side of the fifth ball sending path KR5 and has an inner shape larger than the diameter of the ball.

The guide wall 373Rb is a wall that allows game balls that pass through the inside of the recovery hole 373Ra to flow downward in the direction of gravity. It protrudes from the edge of the recovery hole 373Ra and is formed in a U-shape that is open on the bottom when viewed from the side. Therefore, when the outer cover 374R is placed over the inner cover 373R from the axial outside of the connecting rod 371, a sixth ball sending path KR6 for sending game balls can be formed between the opposing guide walls 373Rb.

The first opening 373Rc is an opening that allows the second rotating body 372Rc and the transmission gear 377Rc to be connected, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the second rotating body 372Rc. This allows the transmission gear 377Rc, which is arranged on the outside of the inner cover 373R, to be connected to the second rotating body 372Rc.

The second opening 373Rd is an opening that allows the drive motor 376R and the transmission gear 377Ra to be connected, and is formed in a circular shape with an outer shape larger than the rotation shaft of the drive motor 376R. This allows the transmission gear 377Ra, which is arranged on the outside of the inner cover 373R, to be connected to the drive motor 376R.

The outer cover 374R is a plate member that is disposed on the left-right outer side of the inner cover 373R, and has an outer shape in a side view that is substantially the same as that of the inner cover 373R. By covering the outer cover 374 from the outside of the inner cover 373R, the sixth ball sending path KR6 described above is formed, and each of the transmission gears 377Ra to 377Rc of the transmission means 377R can be rotatably held between the opposing outer cover 374R and inner cover 373R.

Next, the rotor 372R will be described in detail with reference to Figure 68. Figure 68(a) is a side view of the rotor 372R, Figure 68(b) is a top view of the rotor 372R, Figure 68(c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotor 372R taken along line LXVIIIc-LXVIIIc in Figure 68(b), and Figure 68(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotor 372R taken along line LXVIIId-LXVIIId in Figure 68(b). Note that in Figures 68(a) and 68(b), the outline of the magnet 372Rb is shown by a dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 68, the groove 372Rc2 formed in the second rotor 372Rc of the rotor 372R is recessed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed in the radial direction of the rotor 372R, and its outer shape is set to be larger than the outer shape of the magnet 372Rb. In addition, the groove 372Rc2 has a flat surface located on the radially inner side of the rotor 372R.

Next, the rotation of the rotor 372R will be described with reference to Figures 69 and 70. Figures 69(a) to (c) are schematic cross-sectional views of the displacement unit 560 taken along line LXIX-LXIX in Figure 56(a). Figures 70(a) to (c) are partial top views of the displacement unit 560.

In addition, Fig. 69(a) shows the state where groove portion 372Rc2 of second rotating body 372Rc is adjacent to sixth throwing path KR6, Fig. 69(b) shows the state where groove portion 372Rc2 of second rotating body 372Rc is located at the upper end, and Fig. 69(c) shows the state where groove portion 372Rc2 of second rotating body 372Rc is adjacent to throwing path KR7. Also, Fig. 70(a) shows the state corresponding to Fig. 69(a), Fig. 70(b) shows the state corresponding to Fig. 69(b), and Fig. 70(c) shows the state corresponding to Fig. 69(c).

As shown in Figures 69(a) and 70(a), the second rolling portion 381c of the sixth ball throwing path KR6 is positioned above the rotation axis of the rotor 372R in the direction of gravity. Therefore, when the sixth ball throwing path KR6 and the groove portion 372Rc2 of the second rotor 372Rc are adjacent to each other, the flat surface on the radial inner side of the groove portion 372Rc2 is inclined upward toward the front side.

When a driving force is applied from the drive motor 376R from the state shown in Figures 69(a) and 70(a), the rotating body 372R rotates left around its axis when viewed from the right (as viewed from the direction of Figure 69). Therefore, the state shown in Figures 69(c) and 70(c) is formed via the state shown in Figures 69(b) and 70(b).

As shown in Figures 69(c) and 70(c), the third rolling portion 381d of the seventh ball throwing path KR6 is disposed above the axis of rotation of the rotor 372R in the direction of gravity and is formed above the second rolling portion 381c. Therefore, when the seventh ball throwing path KR7 and the groove portion 372Rc2 of the second rotor 372Rc are adjacent to each other, the flat surface on the radial inner side of the groove portion 372Rc2 is inclined upward toward the back side.

Next, the state in which the variable unit 360 and rear base 390 are combined will be described with reference to Figure 71. Figure 71(a) is a front view of the variable unit 360 and rear base 390, and Figure 71(b) is a top view of the variable unit 360 and rear base 390.

As shown in Figures 71(a) and 71(b), the variable unit 360 is disposed on one side of the rear base 390 below the direction of gravity. In addition, the two annular members 394 of the rear base 390 are disposed on the outer side in the left-right direction of the first rolling portion 381a.

The circular member 394 is disposed below the third ball throwing path KR3 described above. To explain in detail, the third ball throwing path KR3 is connected to the side of the circular member 394 on the second rolling portion 392c side, which is formed in a substantially circular shape. Therefore, the game ball thrown inside the third ball throwing path KR3 can be guided to the upper surface of the circular member 394 and thrown to the second rolling portion 381c on the front side. As described above, the fourth ball throwing path KR4 is connected to the fifth ball throwing path formed by the first rolling portion 382a. That is, the third ball throwing path KR3 is connected to the sixth ball throwing path KR6, and the fourth ball throwing path KR4 is connected to the fifth ball throwing path KR5.

Next, referring to Figures 72 to 74, a game ball passing through the sixth ball sending path will be described. Figures 72(a) to 72(c) are top views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390, Figures 73(a) to 73(c) are cross-sectional views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII in Figure 72(a), and Figures 74(a) to 74(c) are cross-sectional views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in Figure 71(b). Note that Figures 72(a) to 72(c), 73(a) to 73(c), and 74(a) to 74(c) each show the transition state of the game ball.

As shown in Figures 72(a), 73(a) and 74(a), the game ball sent from the third ball sending path KR3 is guided to the upper surface of the circular member 394 and guided to the upper part of the second rolling portion 381c, as described above.

As shown in Figures 72(b), 73(b) and 74(b), the game ball rolling to the upper part of the second rolling portion 392c is rolled by the downward inclination of the second rolling portion 381c (see Figure 74(b)) and is sent along the sixth ball sending path KR6.

As shown in Figures 72(c), 73(c) and 74(c), the game ball sent to the end of the sixth ball sending path KR6 is sent to the recovery hole 373Ra formed in the inner cover 373R, and is collected by flowing down the passage formed between the opposing inner cover 373R and the outer cover 374R. That is, the recovery hole 373Ra of the inner cover 373R is opened at the end of the sixth ball sending path KR6, and the lower end surface of the recovery hole 373Ra is formed at approximately the same height as the second rolling portion 381c or slightly lower. Therefore, the game ball sent to the sixth ball sending path KR6 can be smoothly sent inside the recovery hole 373Ra.

In addition, the second rolling portion 381c is formed as an inclined surface that rolls the game ball in a direction that is approximately parallel to the direction of the rotation axis of the rotating body 372R, so that the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c and the throwing direction of the game ball sent in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating body 372R can be made approximately perpendicular. As a result, it is possible to provide variation in the movement of the game ball and ensure a high number of game balls that can be viewed at one time, improving the player's interest.

Next, referring to Figure 75, a case where the stopper portion 396 of the rear base 390 is displaced will be described. Figure 75(a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit 360 and rear base 390 before the stopper portion 396 is displaced, and Figure 75(b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit 360 and rear base 390 after the stopper portion 396 is displaced. Figures 75(a) and 75(b) correspond to the cross-section of Figure 73(a).

As shown in FIG. 75(a), before the stopper portion 396 is displaced, the end portion A2 is positioned above the axis of the shaft hole 396c in the direction of gravity, as described above. Therefore, the sixth ball sending path KR6 and the collection hole 373Ra of the inner cover 373R are in communication, and game balls passing through the sixth ball sending path KR6 can be collected by passing through the inside of the collection hole 373Ra.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 75(b), when the stopper portion 396 is displaced, the end portion A2 is at approximately the same height in the direction of gravity as the axis of the shaft hole 396c, as described above. Therefore, the stopper portion 396 is interposed between the sixth ball throwing path KR6 and the recovery hole 373Ra, and the sixth ball throwing path KR6 and the recovery hole 373Ra are blocked. As a result, the game ball thrown along the sixth ball throwing path KR6 comes into contact with the stopper portion 396 and stops.

The stopper portion 396 is provided to block the rolling of the game ball in the second rolling portion 381c, and the magnet of the rotating body 372R is disposed in a position where it can attract the game ball whose rolling has been blocked by the stopper portion 396. This allows two modes to be created: a mode in which the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c is directly attracted to the rotating body 372R, and a mode in which the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c is blocked by the stopper portion 396 and then attracted to the rotating body 372R (i.e., a mode in which a game ball that would have passed by without being attracted to the rotating body 372R if it had not been blocked by the stopper portion 396 becomes able to be attracted to the rotating body 372R due to being blocked by the stopper portion 396), thereby increasing the interest of the player.

Next, the game ball sent by the rotating body 372R will be described with reference to Figures 76 to 79. Figures 76 to 78 are top views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390, and Figures 79(a) to 79(c) are cross-sectional views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390.

Note that Fig. 79(a) corresponds to the cross section of Fig. 69(a), Fig. 79(b) corresponds to the cross section of Fig. 69(b), and Fig. 79(c) corresponds to the cross section of Fig. 69(c). Also, Figs. 76 to 78 and Figs. 79(a) to 79(c) show the transition state of the sphere.

As shown in Figures 76 and 79(a), when the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc is adjacent to the sixth ball sending path KR6, the game ball sent along the sixth ball sending path KR6 is attracted to the magnet 372Rb arranged inside the second rotating body 372Rc. In other words, the game ball is attracted to the inner surface of the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc.

When the rotating body 372R is rotated from the state shown in Figures 76 and 79 (a), the rotating body 372R rotates with the ball attracted to the magnet 372Rb of the second rotating body 372Rc.

A gaming machine is known that includes a roughly cylindrical rotating member (rotating bodies 372R, 372L) that is rotatably formed with its rotation axis facing horizontally, and a magnet (372Rb) that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts game balls to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and sends the game balls in the direction of rotation of the rotating member by rotating the rotating member with the game balls attracted to the outer circumferential surface. When two game balls roll in succession toward the rotating member, the leading game ball may be attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and the following game ball may be attracted to the leading game ball. In this case, there is a problem in that when the rotating member rotates, the weight of the two balls acts, releasing the attraction between the rotating member and the leading game ball.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, a second rolling portion 381c is provided that is arranged in parallel with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R and on which the game balls roll, and the second rolling portion 381c is located above the rotation axis of the rotating member in the direction of gravity. Therefore, for example, when two game balls are rolled in a line toward the rotating body 372R on the second rolling portion 381c, and the leading game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R and a following game ball is attracted to the leading game ball, it is possible to make it easier for the leading game ball to be placed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R. This makes it difficult for the attraction between the rotating body 372R and the leading game ball to be released.

The game ball that is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R and sent is received by the third rolling part 381d that is arranged alongside the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R on the opposite side of the rotating body 372R to the second rolling part 381c. However, at this time, the game ball tends to bounce off the third rolling part 381d, making it difficult to send the game ball smoothly from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R to the third rolling part 381d.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the third rolling portion 381d is located above the rotation axis of the rotating body 372R in the direction of gravity, so that the game ball can be prevented from bouncing on the third rolling portion 381d and sent smoothly from the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 372R to the third rolling portion 381d. That is, the game ball can be received by the third rolling portion 381d before the displacement component in the downward direction of gravity becomes large with the rotation of the rotating body 372R (i.e., at a stage where the horizontal component is relatively large), so that the game ball can be prevented from bouncing on the third rolling portion 381d. In addition, before the game ball is received by the third rolling portion 381d, the adsorption of the game ball is released, so that the game ball can be prevented from falling from the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 372R to the third rolling portion 381d. From this point of view, the game ball can be prevented from bouncing on the third rolling portion 381d.

In addition, the third rolling portion 381d is formed with a downward incline in the direction away from the rotating body 372R, so that the throwing direction of the game ball that is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 372R and thrown as the rotating body 372R rotates can be made closer to the rolling direction of the subsequent game ball received by the third rolling portion 381d. As a result, the game ball can be prevented from bouncing on the third rolling portion 381d, and the game ball can be smoothly thrown from the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 372R to the third rolling portion 381d.

The rotating body 372R has a groove 372Rc2 recessed into its outer circumferential surface, and the magnet 372Rb is disposed at a position that allows the gaming ball to be attracted to the inner surface of the groove 372Rc2, so that the gaming ball can be supported by the inner surface of the groove 372Rc2 (the step between the outer circumferential surface). As a result, for example, when two gaming balls are rolled in a line toward the rotating body 372R on the second rolling portion 381c, and the leading gaming ball is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 372R, and a following gaming ball is attracted to the leading gaming ball, it is difficult for the attraction between the rotating body 372R and the leading gaming ball to be released.

The recess depth of groove 372Rc2 is set to a dimension that allows the game ball to come into contact with the bottom surface of groove 372Rc2 when the game ball is fitted in groove 372Rc2, and the dimension is set smaller on the third rolling portion 381d side than on the second rolling portion 381c side. Therefore, when the game ball sent with the rotation of rotor 372R wobbles in the direction of rotation of rotor 372R, the game ball can be easily rolled (dropped off) from groove 372Rc2 to the third rolling portion 381d side. In other words, the game ball can be prevented from being released from adhesion and returning to the second rolling portion 381c.

Next, when the groove portion 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc shown in Fig. 78 and Fig. 79(c) rotates through the state shown in Fig. 77 and Fig. 79(b) to a position adjacent to the seventh ball throwing path KR7, the game ball attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 gets caught on the third rolling portion 381d of the seventh ball throwing path KR7. As a result, the ball is released from the attraction with the magnet 372Rb of the second rotating body 372Rc, and is thrown along the seventh ball throwing path KR7.

If the attraction between the rotating body 372R and the game ball is released below the axis of the rotating body in the direction of gravity, the gravity of the game ball will be more likely to act around the axis of the rotating body 372R, which may increase the rotation speed of the rotating body 372R.

Therefore, when the adhesion between the rotating body 372R and the game ball is released, the kinetic energy of the rotating body 372R increases, causing the rotating body 372 to bounce when it collides with the third rolling part 381d. Alternatively, if the rotating body 372 is rotated and the game ball is sent below the axis of the rotating body 372R in the direction of gravity while the rotating body 372 is attached to the game ball, the rotating body 372 can no longer support the game ball, causing the adhesion between the rotating body 372 and the game ball to be released, causing the game ball to fall onto the third rolling part 381d and bounce.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the base of the third rolling portion 381d is disposed above the axis of the rotating body 372 in the direction of gravity, so that the adhesion between the rotating body 372 and the game ball can be released above the axis of the rotating body 372 in the direction of gravity. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing when the adhesion between the rotating body 372 and the game ball is released.

The third rolling portion 381d is formed with a downward inclination in the direction from the second rolling portion 381c to the third rolling portion 381d, so that the throwing direction of the game ball adsorbed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372 and sent can be made to approximately coincide with the rolling direction of the third rolling portion 381d. Therefore, the game ball adsorbed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372 has kinetic energy in the rotational direction due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 372, so that when the third rolling portion 381d releases the adsorption from the rotating body 372, it is easy to move in the direction in which the kinetic energy acts. As described above, the throwing direction of the game ball adsorbed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372 and sent can be made to approximately coincide with the rolling direction of the third rolling portion 381d, so that the game ball sent to the third rolling portion 381d can be made to roll easily. As a result, the game ball sent to the third rolling portion 381d can be made to roll easily.

The game ball sent along the seventh ball sending path KR7 rolls toward the front side due to the downward inclination of the third rolling portion 381d toward the front side, and is sent to the eighth ball sending path KR8.

Therefore, the game ball sent along the sixth ball sending path KR6 can be sent to the seventh ball sending path KR7 by the rotation of the rotating body 372R. Therefore, since multiple ball sending paths can be formed, the interest of the player can be increased.

Next, referring to Figure 80, the attraction of a game ball to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc will be described in detail. Figure 80 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390. Note that Figure 80 corresponds to the cross-section of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 in Figure 69 (a). Figure 80 also illustrates a state in which the ball has been slightly rotated after being attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2. Furthermore, Figure 80 illustrates the connection portion between the groove portion 372Rc2 on the opposite side to the rotation direction of the rotating body 372 and the second rotating body 372Rc with the symbol of end A3.

As shown in FIG. 80, in a device that attracts and sends game balls to the outer circumferential surface of a rotating body, there is a possibility that a game ball sent later along the sixth ball sending path KR6 will be attracted to a game ball attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2. When a trailing game ball attracts a leading game ball, the gravity of the two game balls acts on the attraction surface between the groove portion 372Rc2 and the leading game ball. As a result, there is a problem in that when the trailing game ball attracts the leading game ball, the attraction between the leading game ball and the groove portion 372Rc2 is released.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, the game ball that is attracted to the inner circumference of groove portion 372Rc2 is sent in a state of contact with end portion A3. As a result, even if a force in the direction of gravity acts on the ball, end portion A3 supports the game ball, making it difficult for the ball to be displaced in the direction of gravity, and preventing the game ball from falling from groove portion 372Rc2. Therefore, even if a trailing game ball is attracted to a leading game ball, it is possible to prevent the attraction between the leading game ball and groove portion 372Rc2 from being released.

As described above, the sixth ball sending path KR6 is formed above the rotation axis of the rotating body 372R in the direction of gravity, so that the game ball attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 can easily come into contact with the end portion A3. As a result, the attraction between the groove portion 372Rc2 and the game ball can be effectively prevented from being released.

Next, the prize winning port unit 600 will be described with reference to Figures 81 to 90. First, the overall configuration of the prize winning port unit 600 will be described with reference to Figures 81 to 83. Figure 81(a) is a front view of the prize winning port unit 600, and Figure 81(b) is a rear view of the prize winning port unit 600. Figure 82 is an exploded front oblique view of the prize winning port unit 600, and Figure 83 is an exploded rear oblique view of the prize winning port unit 600.

As shown in Figures 81 to 83, the winning port unit 600 is mainly formed with a decorative plate 610 having multiple winning ports 26, 27, and 28, a base plate 630 arranged opposite the decorative plate 610 and forming a flow path for game balls between the opposing plates, a path member 640 forming a sending path for game balls between the base plate 630, and a variable winning device 650 arranged on the base plate 630 and guiding game balls flowing between the opposing plates 610 and 630 to one of the winning ports 26, 27, and 28.

The decorative panel 610 is formed from a left cover member 611 with a left start winning opening 26, a right cover member 612 with a right start winning opening 27, and a central cover member 613 with a central start winning opening 28.

The left cover member 611 and the right cover member 612 are formed symmetrically with respect to the center cover member 613, and a detailed explanation will be given only for the right cover member 612. In this case, the left start winning hole 26 corresponds to the right start winning hole 27.

The right cover member 612 is formed from a plate-like body that is curved in a semicircular shape on the lower side in the direction of gravity when viewed from the front, and the right starting winning hole 27 is formed to protrude near the curved axis.

The central cover member 613 is formed in a semicircular shape with a curved upper side when viewed from the front, and is located in the center of the left cover member 611 and the right cover member 612. The central cover member 613 is mainly formed with a guide plate 613a protruding from near the curved axis, erected walls 613b, 613c protruding in an arc shape centered on the curved axis, a middle start winning opening 28 formed between the opposing erected walls 613b, 613c, and cover side protrusions 613d protruding from both sides of the guide plate 613a.

The guide plate 613a is a protrusion for guiding the game ball inserted inside the middle start winning opening 28 to the through hole 632a of the base plate 630, which will be described later, and is positioned above the through hole 632a in the direction of gravity. The guide plate 613a is also formed with its upper surface inclined downward as it approaches the protruding tip. This allows the game ball that passes through the inside of the middle start winning opening 28 and is sent to the upper surface of the guide plate 613a to be rolled to the back side of the base plate 630 and sent to the through hole 632a of the base plate 630.

Furthermore, the guide plate 613a is formed with an abutment surface 613a1 with a large inclination angle on the upper surface on the base side, and a rolling surface 613a2 with a smaller inclination angle than the abutment surface 613a1 on the upper surface on the tip side.

The contact surface 613a1 is a surface that contacts the game ball entered inside the middle start winning opening 28 to stabilize the sending of the game ball to the through hole 632a, and contacts the outer surface of the game ball sent inside the middle start winning opening 28 that is in front of the lower end in the direction of gravity. That is, the distance dimension of the contact surface 613a1 from the connecting part with the rolling surface 613a2 to the base is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball, and the dimension upward in the direction of gravity is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball inserted inside the middle start winning opening 28 can be contacted with the rolling surface 613a2. This allows the component of the force in the direction of gravity of the game ball sent to the middle start winning opening 28 to act on the through hole 632a side by the reaction caused by the collision with the contact surface 613a1. As a result, the game ball sent to the inside of the middle start winning opening 28 can be smoothly guided to the through hole 632a of the base plate 630.

The standing walls 613b, 613c are walls that form the middle start winning opening 28, and are formed symmetrically on either side of the middle start winning opening 28. The standing walls 613b, 613c are formed with one side formed in a curved shape and the other side formed hanging down from the center. The middle start winning opening 28 is formed between the opposing other sides of the standing walls 613b, 613c.

One side of the standing walls 613b, 613c is a rolling surface for sending the game ball that is not inserted into the middle start winning port 28 and flows down the game board 13 to the outlet 71. Since the game ball sent to the upper surface of one side of the standing walls 613b, 613c can be made to flow down outward in the left-right direction, a space can be formed below the standing walls 613b, 613c.

The cover side protrusion 613d is a protrusion for slowing down the speed of the game ball rolling on the top of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 described later, and will be explained in detail later.

The base plate 630 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is provided with a left recess 631, a central recess 632, and a right recess 633, which are recessed toward the rear side at the portions where the cover members 611, 612, and 613 of the decorative plate 610 are arranged.

The left recess 631 is formed with a left through hole 631a formed in a position facing the left starting winning hole 26 of the left cover member 611, and a second through hole 631b located lower in the direction of gravity than the left through hole 631a and formed through the end of the left recess 631.

The left through hole 631a is a path along which the game ball sent inside the left start winning opening 26 flows down, and is formed penetrating from the front side to the back side, with its inner shape being larger than the outer shape of the game ball. This allows the game ball sent to the left start winning opening 26 to be collected via the left through hole 631a.

The second through hole 631b is an opening through which game balls passing near the left start winning port 26 can pass, and is formed at the lower end of the left recess 631 and at a position opposite one end of the path member 640 (described later) on the left side as viewed from the front. This allows game balls that are not sent to the left start winning port 26 but flow down between the opposing left recess 631 and left cover member 611 to be sent to the path member 640 via the second through hole 631b.

The right recess 633 is mainly formed with a right through hole 633a formed in a position facing the right starting winning hole 27 of the right cover member 612, and a second through hole 633b located lower in the direction of gravity than the right through hole 633a and formed through the end of the left recess 631.

The right through hole 633a is a path along which the game ball sent inside the right start winning opening 27 flows down, and is formed penetrating from the front side to the back side, with its inner shape being larger than the outer shape of the ball. This allows the game ball sent to the right start winning opening 27 to be collected via the right through hole 633a.

The second through hole 633b is an opening through which game balls passing near the right start winning opening 27 can pass, and is formed at the lower end of the right recess 633 and at a position opposite the other end of the path member 640 (described later) on the right side when viewed from the front. This allows game balls that are not sent to the right start winning opening 27 but flow down between the right recess 633 and the right cover member 612 to be sent to the path member 640 through the second through hole 633b.

Therefore, the opening of the flow path of the game ball formed between the left and right recesses 631, 633 and the decorative plate 610 is located above the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27 in the direction of gravity, and the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27 are arranged inside the flow path of the game ball formed between the left and right recesses 631, 633 and the decorative plate 610, so that some of the game balls flowing into the second through holes 631b, 633b can be made to enter the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27. In other words, the game balls that flow down without entering the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27 can be reliably made to flow into the path member 640. As a result, the player's expectations of entering the second ball entry opening can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The central recess 632 is mainly formed with a through hole 632a formed in the approximate center of the base plate 630 in the left-right direction, two insertion holes 632c formed on either side of the through hole 632a, a connecting hole 632b opening above the insertion hole 632c, and base side protrusions 632d located on either side of the through hole 632a and protruding toward the central cover member 613.

The through hole 632a is an opening for inserting the game ball rolling on the top of the guide plate 613a into the interior, and is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the ball, and is formed lower in the direction of gravity than the guide plate 613a of the central cover member 613, as described above.

As described above, the insertion holes 632c are formed on both the left and right sides of the through hole 632a. In addition, the insertion holes 632c are formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and are formed with a downward inclination toward the through hole 632a.

The connecting hole 632b is an opening through which the game ball sent along the path member 640 is discharged to the front side of the base plate 630, and is formed above the outer side of the insertion hole 632c (the side away from the through hole 632a), as described below.

The base side protrusion 632d is a protrusion that slows down the speed of the game ball rolling on the top of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650, which protrudes toward the central cover member 613 by inserting through the inside of the insertion hole 632c, and is formed to protrude upward on the through hole 632a side of the insertion hole 632c.

The path member 640 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a roughly box shape that is open on the side of the base plate 630. The path member 640 is a member for forming a path that connects the second through holes 631b, 633b and the connecting hole 632b, and is formed of a first path 641 that is formed on the left side when viewed from the front and connects the second through hole 631b and the connecting hole 632b on the left side when viewed from the front of the base plate 630, and a second path 642 that is formed on the right side when viewed from the front and connects the second through hole 633b and the connecting hole 632b on the right side when viewed from the front of the base plate 630.

The first path 641 and the second path 642 of the path member 640 are formed with a downward incline as they approach each other. This allows the game ball sent from the second through hole 631b to roll along the first path 641 and be sent to the connecting hole 632b. Also, the game ball sent from the second through hole 633b can be sent to the connecting hole 632b by rolling along the second path 642.

The variable winning device 650 is equipped with a variable plate 652 that can be slidably displaced, and is attached to the back side of the base plate 630, with the variable plate 652 inserted into the insertion hole 632c.

Next, the variable prize-winning device 650 will be described with reference to Figures 84 and 85. Figure 84(a) is a front view of the variable prize-winning device 650, and Figure 84(b) is a top view of the variable prize-winning device 650. Figure 85(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the variable prize-winning device 650, and Figure 85(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable prize-winning device 650.

As shown in Figures 84 and 85, the variable winning device 650 is mainly formed by a front base 651 connected to the base plate 630, a variable plate 652 inserted inside the front base 651 and arranged in a manner that allows it to be slidably displaced, a transmission member 653 connected to the base end of the variable plate 652 and capable of rotational displacement by the driving force of the driving means, a cover member 654 arranged around the transmission member 653, and a solenoid 655 of the driving means.

The front base 651 is formed in a generally horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with an opening 651b into which the tip side of the variable plate 652 described later is inserted, and a recovery hole 651a connected to the through hole 632a of the base plate 630.

The recovery hole 651a is a hole for recovering game balls inserted into the through-hole 632a of the base plate 630, and is connected to the back side of the through-hole 632a.

The opening 651b is an opening for stabilizing the sliding of the variable plate 652 when it slides as described below, and is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the variable plate 652 when viewed from the front.

As described above, the two variable plates 652 are plate members that roll the game ball on their upper surfaces, and their tips are inserted through the openings 651b into the insertion holes 632c of the base plate 630. In other words, the variable plates 652 are formed with an incline in the direction in which they approach each other. This allows the game ball to roll when it lands on the upper surface of the variable plates 652, causing it to fall onto the guide plate 613a.

The variable plate 652 also has a recess 652a recessed in the direction of gravity. A rotating shaft 653a of a transmission member 653 (described later) is inserted into the recess 652a to transmit the displacement of the transmission member 653. This transmits a driving force to the variable plate 652, causing the variable plate 652 to slide and displace.

The transmission member 653 is formed in a plate shape, and a rotating shaft 653c formed at one end is connected to an axial hole 654a formed in the cover member 654. The transmission member 653 also has an engagement portion 653b formed to protrude from the center of the rotating shaft 653a, and the engagement portion 653b engages with a protrusion 655a of the solenoid 655. Therefore, when the solenoid 655 is driven, the engagement portion 653b is pushed out, and the transmission member 653 is rotated and displaced around the rotating shaft 653c. This allows the variable plate 652 to be slidably displaced.

Therefore, a variable plate 652 is provided in the through hole 632a on the flow path of the middle start winning opening 28, which makes it easier for the game ball flowing downstream upstream of the through hole 632a to enter the through hole 632a by a displacement action, so that the probability that the game ball that does not enter the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27, but flows downstream near the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27 and is sent to the inside of the path member 640, will enter the through hole 632a can be improved.

In addition, the variable plates 652 are arranged in pairs on either side of the through hole 632a, each inclined downward toward the through hole 632a. When the variable plates 652 are in a protruding state, it becomes easier for game balls flowing down from either the left or right side of the through hole 632a to enter the through hole 632a. This makes the player more excited about the ball entering the through hole 632a. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, as a configuration for making it easier for game balls to enter the through-hole 632a, a pair of wing members, the base end of which is rotatably supported on a rotating shaft protruding from the game board 13, is arranged in the through-hole 632a, and the game ball is guided into the through-hole 632a by opening the wing members (so-called tulips). However, with such a configuration, space is required in the game area for the wing members to rotate (open and close). In particular, space is required above the through-hole 632a for the wing members to assume a closed position. This results in an increase in size in the vertical direction, reducing the space available for arranging other components (for example, the first ball entrance and the liquid crystal display device).

In contrast, according to this embodiment, a pair of variable plates 652, which are formed so that they can protrude toward the front side of the game board 13 and retract toward the rear side, are arranged on both sides of the through hole 632a in an attitude that slopes downward toward the through hole 632a, making it possible to achieve a vertically compact design. As a result, it is possible to ensure space for arranging other components (for example, the first ball entrance and the liquid crystal display device).

Furthermore, since the connecting hole 632b of the pathway member 640 is disposed above the variable plate 652 in the direction of gravity, the protruding variable plate 652 can be used to make it easier for the game ball to enter the through-hole 632a. This makes it possible for the player to have even stronger expectations of the ball entering the through-hole 632a. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, one pair of the second through hole 631b and the route member 640, and one pair of the second through hole 633b and the route member 640 are formed, and the connecting hole 632b of one of the two pairs of route members 640 is disposed above one of the pair of variable plates 652 in the direction of gravity, and the connecting hole 632b of the other of the pair of route members 640 is disposed above the other of the pair of variable plates 652 in the direction of gravity, so that the game ball can be made to enter the through hole 632a even more easily by using each of the pair of variable plates 652. This makes it possible to make the player have a stronger expectation of the ball entering the through hole 632a. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

The second through hole 631b and the path member 640, and the second through hole 633b and the path member 640 are preferably arranged on both the left and right sides of the through hole 632a (for example, the through hole 632a is positioned in the widthwise center of the play area, and two sets are arranged symmetrically in the widthwise direction on either side of the through hole 632a). This is because it makes it easier for game balls flowing down either one or the other side of the widthwise direction of the play area to enter the through hole 632a with respect to the left start winning hole 26 and the right start winning hole 27, and makes the player have stronger expectations of the ball entering the through hole 632a.

In addition, since the edge of the variable plate 652 on the through hole 632a side is located between the edge of the through hole 632a on the lower side in the direction of gravity and the edge of the through hole 632a on the upper side in the direction of gravity, when a game ball is thrown (displaced) in the width direction of the play area, the game ball can be made to abut against the edge of the variable plate 652 on the through hole 632a side in the protruding state, making it easier for the game ball to enter the through hole 632a. In other words, it is possible to prevent a game ball thrown (displaced) from one side in the width direction of the play area from passing in front of the through hole 632a and being thrown (displaced) to the other side in the width direction (the game ball escaping in the width direction of the play area without entering the through hole 632a).

Next, the ball sending path of the winning port unit 600 will be described with reference to Figures 86 and 87. Figure 86(a) is a front view of the winning port unit 600, and Figure 86(b) is a top view of the winning port unit 600. Figures 87(a) and 87(b) are partial front views of the winning port unit 600 in range LXXXVII of Figure 86.

In addition, FIG. 87(a) illustrates the state before the variable winning device 650 is displaced, and FIG. 87(b) illustrates the state after the variable winning device 650 is displaced. Also, in FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, the decorative plate 610 is shown in a transparent state. In FIG. 86(a), the path member 640 is shown by a dashed line.

As shown in Figures 86(a) and 86(b), the second through hole 631b and the connecting hole 632b are connected by a first path 641 of a path member 640 disposed on the back side of the base plate 630. Meanwhile, the second through hole 633b and the connecting hole 632b are connected by a second path 642 of the path member 640. Therefore, the game balls that are not sent to the left start winning hole 26 and the right start winning hole 27 but are sent to each of the second through holes 631b, 633b are sent inside the path member 640 and discharged from the connecting hole 632b.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 87(a), before the variable winning device 650 is driven, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is retracted toward the rear side of the central recess 632 of the base plate 630. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the connecting hole 632b flows downward and is collected by the outlet 71 formed in the game board 13.

87(b), when the variable winning device 650 is driven (the variable plate is slid), the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is in a state of protruding forward from the central recess 632 of the base plate 630. Thus, the game ball discharged from the connecting hole 632b is sent to the upper surface of the variable plate 652.

Here, a gaming machine equipped with a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port is known. In this case, a gaming ball that does not enter the first ball entry port does not enter the second ball entry port, but is only collected from the out port. Therefore, if a gaming ball aimed at the first ball entry port does not enter the first ball entry port, the player cannot have any expectations about the subsequent fate of the gaming ball (the gaming ball flowing down). This causes a problem in that it is not possible to provide sufficient interest to the player.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the game machine includes a path member 640 that forms a passage for game balls that do not enter the left start winning hole 26 or the right start winning hole 27 and flow down, a game board 13 with a game area formed on the front side, and a plate-shaped variable plate 652 that can protrude to the front side of the game board 13 and can be retracted to the rear side. The game ball that passes through the path member 640 can be guided to the through hole 632a by the variable plate 652 that protrudes to the front side of the game board 13. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the left start winning hole 26 or the right start winning hole 27, the player can be drawn to the flow of the game ball and continue to have hope that the ball will enter the through hole 632a. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the variable plate 652 is formed so that it can protrude to the front side of the game board 13 and retract to the rear side, when the variable plate 652 is not in function, it can be retracted to the rear side of the game board 13, thereby securing space on the front side of the game board 13 (expanding the game area). In other words, the area in the game area where the game ball can move can be expanded.

Examples of the path member 640 include a closed passage through which the game ball can pass, a path formed by one or more nails that determine the direction in which the game ball flows down, and a slope (open path) along which the game ball can roll.

Of course, even when the variable plate 652 is sunk into the back side of the game board 13, it is possible for a game ball that has passed through the path member 640 to enter the through hole 632a. In this case, it is preferable that the ball is more likely to enter the through hole 632a when the variable plate 652 is protruding than when it is sunk. This is because it draws attention to the state of the variable plate 652, which increases the interest of the game.

As described above, the probability that the wing 312 opens and closes to cause the game ball to flow into the movable ball entry device 300 when the game ball enters the center start entry port 28 is set higher than the probability that the wing 312 opens and closes to cause the game ball to flow into the movable ball entry device 300 when the game ball enters the left start entry port 26 and the right start entry port 27. Therefore, the player can have more hope that the game ball that does not enter the left start entry port 26 and the right start entry port 27 will enter the center start entry port 28. As a result, the player's interest can be prevented from being lost.

In other words, the profit given to the player by the ball entering the through hole 632a is considered to be higher than the profit given to the player by the ball entering the left start winning hole 26 and the right start winning hole 27. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the left start winning hole 26 and the right start winning hole 27, the player can have a stronger expectation that the game ball will enter the through hole 632a. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Examples of configurations that provide a higher profit to the player include configurations in which more prize balls are paid out when a ball goes in, configurations in which the opening time of the wing 312 that allows/restricts the entry of a ball into the third ball entry port (between the recess 311a and the upper front cover 313) is extended, configurations in which the wing 312 is opened a greater number of times, and configurations in which the opening range of the wing 312 is increased.

In addition, since the base plate 60 is made of a transparent flexible material, the player can visually see the intersection of two paths, one flowing down the back side of the base plate 60 and the other flowing down the front side of the base plate 60. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

That is, the pathway member 640 includes a second through hole 631b and a second through hole 633b that receive game balls that do not enter the left start winning port 26 and the right start winning port 27 and flow down, and a connecting hole 632b that allows game balls that flow in from the second through hole 631b and the second through hole 633b to flow out to the game area, and is formed from a transparent flexible material, so that the player can visually see how the game balls that flow in from the second through hole 631b and the second through hole 633b flow down (pass) toward the connecting hole 632b (second ball entry port). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the configuration around the through hole 632a will be described in detail with reference to Figure 88. Figure 88(a) is a top view of the prize winning port unit 600, Figure 88(b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning port unit 600 taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in Figure 88(a), and Figure 88(c) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning port unit 600 taken along line LXXXVIIIc-LXXXVIIIc in Figure 81(a).

As shown in FIG. 88(a) to FIG. 88(c), an insertion hole 632c is opened at both left and right ends of the through hole 632a, and the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is inserted inside. In this case, the height of the end of the variable plate 652 on the through hole 632a side is set to be approximately the same as the middle position of the height of the through hole 632a in the gravity direction. This ensures a height distance between the end of the variable plate 652 on the through hole 632a side and the guide plate 613a. As a result, when the game ball rolling on the upper part of the variable plate 652 is sent to the through hole 632a, the falling distance to the guide plate 613a can be ensured, so that the impact force when the ball hits the abutment surface 613a1 can be ensured, and the ball can be sent smoothly to the through hole 632a.

The base side protrusion 632d of 632a protruding from the central recess 632 of the base plate 630 is formed into a generally triangular cross section with the protruding distance decreasing outward from the through hole 632a. The cover side protrusion 613d protruding from the central cover member 613 is also formed into a triangular cross section with the protruding distance decreasing outward from the through hole 632a. In addition, the base side protrusion 632d and the cover side protrusion 613d are formed at different positions in the front-to-rear direction, with the base side protrusion 632d being formed closer to the through hole 632a side than the cover side protrusion 613d.

In addition, a guide plate 613a is provided that projects from the edge of the through hole 632a below the direction of gravity toward the front side of the game board, and the guide plate 613a is formed with a downward incline toward the through hole 632a, so that not only when the variable plate 652 is in a protruding state, but also when the variable plate 652 is in a recessed state, game balls that do not enter the left start winning hole 26 and the right start winning hole 27 but flow downward (passing through the path member 640) can be made to enter the through hole 632a more easily. This makes it possible for the player to have stronger expectations about the ball entering the through hole 632a. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, referring to Figure 89, a game ball inserted through the middle start winning hole 28 will be described. Figures 89(a) to 89(c) are cross-sectional views of the winning hole unit 600. Note that Figures 89(a) to 89(c) correspond to Figure 88(b). Also, Figures 89(a) to 89(c) illustrate the respective transition states.

As shown in Figures 89(a) to 89(c), when a game ball is inserted through the middle start winning hole 28, it comes into contact with the end of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 on the side of the through hole 7632a when it flows down the upper surface of the guide plate 613a, and can be sent stably to the through hole 632a.

Here, if the guide plate 613a were to catch the game ball as it flows down, the impact of the collision could cause the ball to sway left and right and prevent it from entering the through hole 632a.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the height position of the end of the variable plate of the variable winning device 650 on the side of the through hole 632a is set to be approximately the same as the middle position of the through hole 632a in the direction of gravity, so that when the ball is deflected left or right by the impact of colliding with the guide plate 613a, it can come into contact with the side of the variable plate and be sent smoothly into the through hole 632a.

Next, referring to Figures 90(a) to 90(c), a description will be given of the game ball sent over the upper part of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650. Figures 90(a) to 90(c) are cross-sectional views of the winning port unit 600. Note that Figures 90(a) to 90(c) correspond to Figure 88(c).

As shown in Figures 90(a) to 90(c), a game ball sent to the path member 640 and to the upper part of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 rolls forward with the force of being discharged from the connecting hole 632b of the base plate 630, and rolls toward the through hole 632a due to the inclination of the variable plate 652, and comes into contact with the cover side protrusion 613d of the central cover member 613. As a result, the ball is guided toward the back side by the protrusion shape of the cover side protrusion 613d, and rolls along the upper part of the variable plate 652 toward the through hole 632a.

Next, the game ball, which is sent to the rear side by the cover-side protrusion 613d and rolls toward the through-hole 632a, comes into contact with the base-side protrusion 632d. As a result, the ball is guided to the front side by the protrusion shape of the base-side protrusion 632d, and rolls along the upper part of the variable plate 652 toward the through-hole 632a, and flows down to the upper part of the guide plate 613a.

Here, if the game ball rolling on the top of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 does not come into contact with the cover side protrusion 613d and the base side protrusion 632d, the ball will roll faster, causing the game ball to be sent unstably to the top of the guide plate 613a, which could lead to the game ball being sent unstably to the through hole 632a.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the game ball rolling on the top of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 can be abutted against the cover side protrusion 613d and the base side protrusion 632d, slowing down the ball's rolling speed and stabilizing the sending of the game ball to the through hole 632a.

In addition, in this embodiment, the base-side protrusion 632d is formed closer to the through-hole 632a than the cover-side protrusion 613d, so that the game ball falling onto the guide plate 613a can be reliably abutted against the abutment surface 613a1 of the guide plate 613a. As a result, the game ball can be sent stably to the through-hole 632a.

Furthermore, on the upper surface of the guide plate 613a, a ball throwing surface located closer to the through hole 632a and a contact surface 613a1 connected to the ball throwing surface and located farther from the through hole 632a than the rolling surface 613a2 are formed, and the angle of the downward inclination of the contact surface 613a1 toward the through hole 632a is made larger than the angle of the downward inclination of the ball throwing surface toward the through hole 632a, so that the downward inclination of the contact surface 613a1 can be used to smoothly enter the through hole 632a. In particular, even when the slide member is retracted, the inclination of the contact surface 613a1, which has a large downward inclination, can be used to make it easier for a game ball that does not enter the first ball entrance and flows down (passes through the passage member) to enter the through hole 632a.

Next, the variable unit 2360 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 91 to 96. Note that the same parts as those in the first embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the magnet 372Rb disposed on the rotor 372R is smaller than the recess 372Rc1, but in the second embodiment, it is larger than the magnet 2372Rb disposed on the rotor 2372R. Note that the same parts as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

Figure 91(a) is a front view of the variable unit 2360 in the second embodiment, Figure 91(b) is a top view of the variable unit 2360, and Figure 91(c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 taken along line XCIc-XCIc in Figure 91(b). Figure 92 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable unit 2360. Figure 93 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable unit 2360. Note that in Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the outline of the magnet 2372Rb is shown by a dashed line.

As shown in Figures 91 to 93, the rotating body 2372R in the second embodiment is formed with a first rotating body 2372Ra arranged on the main body 380 side, a second rotating body 2372Rc connected to the first rotating body 2372Ra, and a magnet 2372Rb arranged inside the second rotating body 2372Rc and the first rotating body 2372Ra.

The first rotor 2372Ra is a cylindrical rotor that rotates while connected to the connecting rod 371, and is mainly formed with a through hole 372Ra1 that opens to the shaft and a recess 2372Ra2 that is recessed toward the main body side.

The recess 2372Ra2 is a recess that accommodates the main body 380 side of the magnet 2372Rb (described later), and is recessed in a shape that corresponds to the curved shape of the magnet 2372Rb. This allows the magnet 2372Rb to be accommodated inside the first rotating body 2372.

Here, in order to prevent the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c from being attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 2372R by the magnet 2372Rb disposed inside the rotating body 2372R, and to attract the game ball to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 2372R at the attraction position between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball, it is necessary to change the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb acting on the radially outer side of the rotating body 2372R. That is, in the portion where the rolling speed of the game ball is slowed, the magnetic force acting on the radially outer side of the rotating body 2372R needs to be relatively small, and in the portion where the game ball is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 2372R, the magnetic force acting on the radially outer side of the rotating body 2372R needs to be relatively large.

Therefore, it was necessary to arrange two magnets 2372Rb with different magnetic forces inside the rotor 2372R for the part that slows down the rolling speed of the game ball and the part that attracts the game ball to the outer circumferential surface of the rotor 2372R, or to arrange a magnet 2372Rb that protrudes radially outward only in the attraction part. This caused the problem of increased costs in manufacturing the magnets 2372Rb.

In contrast, according to the second embodiment, the magnet 2372Rb is disposed at a position spaced the same distance radially outward from the axis of the rotor 2372R, and a radially recessed groove 2372Rc2 is formed at the position where the rotor 2372R and the game ball are attracted to each other. Since the groove 2372Rc2 is formed radially recessed, the magnetic force acting outside the attraction position can be made relatively strong. This makes it possible to form a portion that slows down the rolling speed of the game ball and a portion that attracts the game ball to the outer circumferential surface of the rotor 2372R without complicating the shape of the magnet 2372Rb, thereby suppressing an increase in manufacturing costs.

The second rotating body 2372Rc is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter that is approximately the same as that of the first rotating body 2372, and is arranged coaxially with the first rotating body 2372Ra and attached to the first rotating body 372Ra.

The second rotating body 372Rc is formed with a recess 372Rc1 recessed from the main body 380 side toward the outside, and a groove 2372Rc2 recessed into the outer peripheral surface on the radially outer side of the recess 372Rc1.

The groove portion 2372Rc2 is formed so that the radial recess distance is smaller toward the first rotating body 372Ra side (see FIG. 91(c)). This makes it possible to prevent a game ball attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the first rotating body 2372Ra from falling from the rotating body 2372R into the groove portion 2372Rc2 when the game ball is rolled around the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 2372R and received inside the groove portion 2372Rc2. As a result, the game ball can be sent stably to the groove portion 2372Rc2. The sending of the game ball from the rotating body 2372R will be described later.

Next, magnet 2372Rb will be described with reference to Figure 94. Figure 94(a) is a front view of magnet 2372Rb, Figure 94(b) is a top view of magnet 2372Rb, and Figure 94(c) is a side view of magnet 2372Rb.

As shown in Figures 94(a) to 94(c), the magnet 2372Rb is formed in a curved shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the first rotating body 2372Ra in a side view. The magnet 2372Rb is also curved in the rotation direction of the rotating body 2372R toward the left side in a front view (left side in Figure 94(a)).

The rotating body 2372R configured as above is assembled as follows. First, one side of the magnet 2372Rb is inserted inside the recess 2372Ra2 of the first rotating body 2372Ra. Next, the magnet 2372Rb protruding from the recess 2372Ra2 of the first rotating body 2372Ra is inserted into the recess 2372Rc1 of the second rotating body 2372Rc while fastening the first rotating body 2372Ra and the second rotating body 2372Rc, thereby assembling the rotating body 2372R.

Next, the attraction between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball will be described with reference to Figures 95 and 96. Figures 95(a) to 95(c) are top views of the variable unit 2360. Figure 96(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 taken along line XCVIa-XCVIa in Figure 95(a), Figure 96(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 taken along line XCVIb-XCVIb in Figure 95(b), and Figure 96(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 taken along line XCVIc-XCVIc in Figure 95(c). Note that Figures 95(a) to 95(c) show the transition state of the ball. Also, in Figures 95(a) to 95(c), the magnet 2372Rb is shown by a dashed line.

As shown in Figures 95(a) and 96(a), when the magnet 2372Rb on the first rotating body 2372Ra is adjacent to the sixth ball sending path KR6, when a game ball is sent to the sixth ball sending path KR6, the ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 2372Ra by the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb.

As shown in Figures 95(b) and 96(b), when a game ball is adsorbed to the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 2372Ra and the rotating body 2372R rotates around its axis, the ball is displaced downward by its own weight and sent along the sixth ball sending path KR6.

That is, in the portion where the rolling of the game ball is slowed down, when the magnet 2372Rb is located at a position adjacent to the second rolling portion 381c due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 2372R, the game ball rolls on the second rolling portion 381c, and the rolling of the game ball can be slowed down. Also, since the magnet 2372Rb is formed by bending around the axis in the rotational direction of the rotating body 2372R, the position where the magnet 2372Rb and the second rolling portion 381c are adjacent can be displaced toward the adsorption position of the rotating body 2372R as the rotating body 2372R rotates. Therefore, the game ball whose speed of rolling on the second rolling portion 381c is slowed down by the magnet 2372Rb can be rolled radially outward from the adsorption position as the rotating body 2372R rotates. This allows the game ball, whose rolling speed on the second rolling portion 381c has been slowed down, to be attracted to the rotating body 2372R.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a roughly cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with its rotation axis facing horizontally, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts a gaming ball to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and that sends the gaming ball in the direction of rotation of the rotating member by rotating the rotating member with the gaming ball attracted to the outer circumferential surface. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the gaming ball rolls while swinging on the rolling surface, so there is a problem that even when the rotating member is rotated and the gaming ball rolls on the rolling surface at a timing that allows it to face the attracting position of the rotating member, the gaming ball is difficult to attract to the attracting position.

In contrast, according to the second embodiment, the magnet 2372Rb is disposed at least at an attraction position where the game ball is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 2372R, and at an upstream position that is upstream of the attraction position on the rolling surface, so that the game ball can be attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 2372R by the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb disposed at the upstream position, and the game ball can be prevented from rolling while swinging on the rolling surface. As a result, when the rotating body 2372R is rotated and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface at a timing when it can face the attraction position of the rotating body 2372R, the game ball can be easily attracted to the attraction position.

The magnet 2372Rb disposed at the attraction position and the magnet 2372Rb disposed at the upstream position may be formed separately (i.e., two magnets 2372Rb), or may be formed integrally (i.e., one magnet 2372Rb).

Here, it is necessary to attract the gaming ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R at the attraction position, but not to attract the gaming ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R at the upstream position. To achieve this by using the difference in magnetic force of the magnets 2372Rb (i.e., by placing a magnet 2372Rb with strong magnetic force at the attraction position and a magnet 2372Rb with weak magnetic force at the upstream position), it is necessary to prepare two types of magnets 2372Rb with different magnetic forces, which leads to an increase in product costs.

In contrast, according to the second embodiment, the rotating body 2372R has a groove 2372Rc2 recessed into its outer circumferential surface to serve as an attraction position, so that by embedding one magnet 2372Rb in the rotating body 2372R, the groove 2372Rc2 can be used to set the distance from the magnet 2372Rb to the game ball at the attraction position (the distance from the magnet 2372Rb to the bottom surface of the groove 2372Rc2) to a dimension smaller than the distance from the magnet 2372Rb to the game ball at the upstream position (the distance from the magnet 2372Rb to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 2372R). In other words, it is possible to attract the game ball to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 2372R at the attraction position, while not attracting the game ball to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 2372R at the upstream position. Therefore, there is no need for two types of magnets 2372Rb, and there is no need to complicate the shape of magnets 2372Rb, which reduces product costs.

In addition, when a game ball is attracted to the attraction position, the game ball can be held by the groove portion 2372Rc2. Therefore, when the game ball is sent in accordance with the rotation of the rotating body 2372R, the game ball can be prevented from wobbling in the rotation direction of the rotating body 2372R, and as a result, the attraction of the game ball can be prevented from being released.

Here, if a ball sending path KR5 is formed along the axis of the rotating body 2372R, the ball may not be able to be attracted to the rotating body 2372R because the ball rolls too fast or the ball wobbles on the rolling surface.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a fifth ball sending path KR5 is formed on the radial outside of the rotating body 2372R, which rolls the game ball and sends it to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 2372R. The fifth ball sending path KR5 is formed by extending in the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R, and the magnet 2372Rb is extended upstream of the fifth ball sending path KR5 from the adsorption position between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball. Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb arranged on the rotating body 2372R slows down the rolling of the game ball rolling on the fifth ball sending path KR5 and suppresses the wobbling of the second rolling portion 381c of the game ball, allowing the game ball to be adsorbed to the rotating body 2372R.

That is, the magnet 2372Rb disposed on the rotating body 2372R is extended upstream of the second rolling portion 381c from the position where the rotating body 2372R and the game ball are attracted to each other, so that the magnetic force of the magnet can be applied to the second rolling portion 381c. As a result, the game ball rolling on the first ball sending surface is pulled toward the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 2372R by the action of the magnet 2372Rb, so that the ball sending speed can be slowed down and the wobbling of the game ball rolling unsteadily on the second rolling portion 381c can be eliminated. As a result, the game ball can be attracted to the attraction surface between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball.

In addition, as the width of the second rolling portion 381c in the rolling direction of the game ball moves downstream, the partition wall 2381g arranged opposite the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 2372R moves closer to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body. In other words, since the second rolling portion 381c narrows toward the downstream side, if the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c sways left and right in the throwing direction, the swaying caused by the rolling of the game ball can be suppressed.

In particular, in the second embodiment, the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb disposed on the rotor 2372R acts upstream of the attraction position between the rotor 2372R and the game ball on the second rolling section 381c, and therefore the swinging motion of the game ball rolling on the first ball sending surface can be suppressed together with the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb, making it possible to suppress the swinging of the game ball over a relatively short rolling distance.

In other words, a partition wall 2381g is provided that stands from the second rolling portion 381c while facing the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 2372R and partitions the rolling area of the game ball, and the opposing distance between the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 2372R and the partition wall 2381g is set to a smaller dimension toward the downstream side of the second rolling portion 381c, so that the game ball can be prevented from rolling while swinging on the second rolling portion 381c not only by the action of the magnet at the upstream position (attraction by magnetic force) but also by the guidance of the partition wall 2381g. As a result, when the rotating body 2372R rotates and the game ball rolls on the second rolling portion 381c at a timing when it can face the adsorption position of the rotating body 2372R, the game ball can be easily attracted to the adsorption position.

Furthermore, the end of the groove 2372Rc2 upstream of the second rolling portion 381c is connected to the outer peripheral surface of the rotor 2372R, so that the magnetic force of the portion that slows down the rolling of the game ball prevents the game ball, which is drawn in the axial direction of the rotor 2372R, from bouncing as it rolls inside the groove 2372Rc2 of the rotor 2372R. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly attracted to the inside of the groove 2372Rc2.

In addition, the length dimension of the third rolling portion 381d along the rotational axis direction is set to a dimension greater than the length dimension along the rotational axis direction of the magnet disposed on the rotating body 2872R. Therefore, even if the game ball is attracted to a location other than the attraction position of the rotating body 2872R (i.e., attracted to a magnet at an upstream position) and is sent as the rotating body 2872R rotates, the game ball can be received by the third rolling portion 381d.

As shown in Figures 95(c) and 96(c), when a game ball adsorbed to the outside of the first rotating body 2372Ra flows down the fifth ball sending path KR5 and is adsorbed into the groove portion 2372Rc2 of the second rotating body 2372Rc, the game ball can be sent to the seventh ball sending path KR7 by rotating the rotating body 2372R while the game ball is adsorbed inside the groove portion 2372Rc2, as in the first embodiment.

Here, if the magnet 2372Rb arranged inside the rotating body 2372R is extended in the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R beyond the position of attraction between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball, and the throwing direction of the game ball rolling on the third rolling portion 381d is formed along the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R, there is a risk that the game ball rolling on the third rolling portion 381d will be affected by the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb arranged on the rotating body 2372R.

In contrast, according to the second embodiment, a third rolling portion 381d is formed on the radial outside of the rotating body 2372R, opposite the second rolling portion 381c across the rotating body 2372R, which releases the game ball that is attracted to the rotating body 2372R and rolls the game ball to send it. The third rolling portion 381d is formed with a downward incline from the second rolling portion 381c toward the third rolling portion 381d, so that the third rolling portion 381d can prevent the game ball that has been released from adhesion to the rotating body 2372R from being attracted to the rotating body 2372R again.

That is, the throwing direction of the game ball at the third rolling portion 381d is formed in a direction away from the rotating body 2372R radially outward. This prevents the game ball sent to the third rolling portion 381d from being attracted again to the outer periphery of the rotating body 2372R, or from being affected by the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb, slowing down the speed at which the game ball rolls on the third rolling portion 381d.

The third rolling portion 381d is formed to be larger than the axial dimension of the rotating body 2372R and is disposed in a position opposite the rotating body 2372R. Therefore, when a game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R other than the attraction position and sent to the third rolling portion 381d, the third rolling portion 381d can release the attraction between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball, and send the game ball to the third rolling portion 381d.

In addition, at least a portion of the portion of the magnet 2372Rb that is disposed in the upstream position is disposed further forward in the direction of rotation of the rotor 2372R than the portion that is disposed in the attraction position, so that the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb in the upstream position can be easily applied to the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c toward the attraction position. In other words, the game ball can be attracted toward the outer circumferential surface of the rotor 2372R, and the game ball can be prevented from rolling while swinging on the second rolling portion 381c. As a result, when the rotor 2372R rotates and the game ball rolls on the second rolling portion 381c at a timing that allows it to face the attraction position of the rotor 2372R, the game ball can be easily attracted to the attraction position.

Furthermore, the bottom surface of groove 2372Rc2 is inclined upward toward the upstream position and smoothly connects to the outer circumferential surface of rotor 2372R, and is formed so that a game ball can abut against the bottom surface of groove 2372Rc2 at least on the upstream position side. Therefore, when a game ball is attracted to the outer circumferential surface side of rotor 2372R by magnet 2372Rb at the upstream position and fits into groove 2372Rc2 by magnet 2372Rb at the attraction position, the game ball can be smoothly fitted into groove 2372Rc2. In other words, the game ball is prevented from bouncing, making it easier to attract the game ball to the attraction position (groove 2372Rc2).

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 97 and 98. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the radially inner surface of the groove 372Rc2 of the rotor 372R is formed in a plane perpendicular to the radial direction. In the third embodiment, the groove 3372Ra2 is formed so that the radially inner surface is inclined relative to the direction perpendicular to the radial direction.

Figure 97(a) is a side view of the rotating body 3372R in the third embodiment, Figure 97(b) is a top view of the rotating body 3372, Figure 97(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XCVIIc-XCVIIc in Figure 97(b), and Figure 97(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XCVIId-XCVIId in Figure 97(b). Figures 98(a) and 98(b) are cross-sectional views of the variable unit 360. Note that the cross-section in Figure 98(a) corresponds to the cross-section in Figure 69(a), and the cross-section in Figure 98(b) corresponds to the cross-section in Figure 69(b).

As shown in Figures 97(a) to (d), the rotating body 3372R in the third embodiment is formed mainly by including a first rotating body 372Ra arranged on the main body 380 side, a second rotating body 3372Rc connected to the first rotating body 372Ra, and a magnet 372Rb arranged inside the second rotating body 3372Rc and applying a magnetic force to the outside of the second rotating body 3372Rc.

The second rotating body 3372Rc is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter substantially the same as that of the first rotating body 372Ra, and is disposed coaxially with and attached to the first rotating body 372Ra.

The second rotating body 372Rc is a ball-sending member that attracts and sends a game ball to its outer circumferential surface, and is mainly formed with a recess 3372Rc1 into which a magnet 372Rb is inserted, and a groove 3372Rc2 recessed into the outer circumferential surface radially outside the recess 3372Rc1.

The recess 3372Rc1 is recessed into the surface to which the first rotating body 372Ra is attached, and is recessed to a depth approximately equal to the outer diameter of the magnet 372Rb. The recess 3372Rc1 is recessed into a generally rectangular shape in side view, and one of the two opposing inner surfaces is formed parallel to the recessed tip surface of the groove 3372Rc2, which will be described later.

The groove 3372Rc2 is recessed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed radially of the second rotating body 3372Rc, and has a substantially triangular cross section when viewed axially of the second rotating body 3372Rc. That is, the groove 3372Rc2 is formed such that the recessed tip surface on the rotational direction side of the second rotating body 3372Rc is connected to the outer circumferential surface of the second rotating body 3372Rc.

As described above, the recess 3372Rc1 of the second rotor 3372Rc is formed with an inner surface parallel to the recessed tip surface of the groove 3372Rc2. As a result, the magnet 372Rb disposed inside the groove 3372Rc2 is disposed with the end portion on the rotational direction side of the rotor 3372R partially positioned radially outward (see FIG. 97(c)).

Next, the rotational displacement of the rotor 3372R will be described with reference to Figure 98. As shown in Figures 98(a) and (b), when the groove portion 3372Rc2 of the rotor 3372R is located adjacent to the sixth ball throwing path KR6, when a game ball is thrown along the sixth ball throwing path KR6, the game ball is attracted to the groove portion 3372Rc2 by the magnet 372Rb arranged inside the rotor as in the first embodiment (see Figure 98(a)).

As shown in FIG. 98(a), when the game ball is attached to the rotating body 3372R and the rotating body 3372R is rotated around the axis of the connecting rod 371, the game ball is sent while being attached to the groove portion 3372Rc2 of the rotating body 3372R, as shown in FIG. 98(b).

In the third embodiment, as described above, the recessed tip surface of the groove portion 3372Rc2 on the rotational direction side of the second rotating body 3372Rc is formed to be connected to the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 3372Rc, making it easier for the game ball to fall out in the rotational direction of the rotating body 3372R.

In other words, by not forming a step-like difference in the rotational direction of groove portion 3372Rc2, the game ball attracted to groove portion 3372Rc2 can be easily displaced in the rotational direction. This makes it easier for the game ball attracted to groove portion 3372Rc2 of the rotating body to fall toward the seventh ball sending path of the subsequent ball sending path when the attraction is released due to shaking of the gaming machine body or the like. As a result, when the attraction between the rotating body 3372R and the game ball is released, the game ball is prevented from returning to the sixth ball sending path, and the sending of the game ball from the rotating body 3372R can be stabilized.

In this case, each of the rotating bodies 3372Ra, 3372Rc of the rotating body 3372R is formed in a cylindrical shape, so that the game ball can be sent along its outer circumferential surface to the seventh ball sending path KR7. This releases the adhesion between the rotating body 3372R and the game ball, and reduces the distance over which the game ball falls freely when it is dropped onto the seventh ball sending path KR7, so that the impact of the game ball dropping onto the third rolling portion 381d of the seventh ball sending path KR7 can be reduced. As a result, the game ball can be prevented from bouncing up due to a collision with the third rolling portion 381d, and the sending of the game ball can be stabilized.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the end of the magnet 372Rb facing the direction of rotation of the rotor 3372R is arranged in a state where it is partially positioned radially outward, so that the magnetic force of the magnet acting on the outside of the rotor 3372R can be strengthened accordingly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the adhesion between the rotor 3372R and the game ball from being released, and the throw of the game ball can be further stabilized.

Next, the rotating body 4372R in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 99 to 101. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which when a trailing game ball sent later adheres to a leading game ball that has been adhered to the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotating body 372R, the leading game ball can be prevented from falling out of the groove portion 372Rc2. In the fourth embodiment, a case is described in which when a trailing game ball sent later adheres to a leading game ball that has been adhered to the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotating body 4372R, the leading game ball and the trailing game ball fall out of the groove portion 372Rc2.

First, the rotating body 4372R in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 99. Figure 99(a) is a side view of the rotating body 4372R in the fourth embodiment, Figure 99(b) is a top view of the rotating body 4372R, Figure 99(c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 4372R taken along line XCIXc-XCIXc in Figure 99(b), and Figure 99(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 4372R taken along line XCIXd-XCIXd in Figure 99(b).

The rotating body 4372R is formed with a first rotating body 372Ra arranged on the main body 380 side, a second rotating body 4372Rc connected to the first rotating body 372Ra, and a magnet 372Rb arranged inside the second rotating body 4372Rc and having magnetic force.

The second rotating body 4372Rc is formed in a cylindrical shape with approximately the same outer shape as the first rotating body 372Ra, and is arranged coaxially with and attached to the first rotating body 372Ra.

The second rotating body 4372Rc is a part that attracts and sends game balls to its outer peripheral surface, and is mainly formed with a recess 372Rc1 into which a magnet 372Rb (described later) is inserted, a groove 372Rc2 recessed into the outer peripheral surface radially outside the recess 372Rc1, and a recess 4372Rc5 recessed into the outer peripheral surface a predetermined distance away from the groove 372Rc2.

The recessed portion 4372Rc5 is formed as a curved surface (spherical surface) whose center is located radially outside the rotating body 4372R, and the radius of the sphere forming the curved surface is set to a dimension larger than the radius of the game ball.

In the fourth embodiment, the predetermined distance between the groove portion 372Rc2 and the recessed portion 4372Rc5 is set to a distance that prevents a trailing game ball from coming into contact with the radially outer end face (the outer peripheral surface excluding the recessed portion 4372Rc5) of the rotating body 4372R when the trailing game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the rotating body 4372R.

Next, referring to Figures 100 to 102, we will explain what happens when two game balls are attracted to the rotating body 4372R. Figures 100 to 102 are cross-sectional views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390.

Note that Figs. 100 to 102 correspond to the cross-sections of the variable unit 360 and rear base 390 in Fig. 69(a). Figs. 100 to 102 also sequentially illustrate the transition states when the rotating body 4372R is rotated.

As shown in FIG. 100, when two game balls are successively sent to the sixth ball sending path KR6 (the trailing game ball is sent following the leading game ball), the leading game ball is attracted by the magnetic force of the magnet 372Rb arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 and is attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2. In this case, the leading game ball becomes magnetic due to the magnetic force of the magnet 372Rb, so when the trailing game ball is sent following the leading game ball, the trailing game ball is attracted to the leading game ball.

Also, as shown in FIG. 100, before the trailing game ball adheres to the leading game ball and is lifted from the second rolling portion 381c, the trailing game ball is supported by the second rolling portion 381c and is not guided inside the recessed portion 4372Rc5, but is positioned outside the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 4372R.

As shown in FIG. 101, when the rotating body 4372R rotates from the position shown in FIG. 100, the trailing game ball is lifted from the second rolling portion 381c. In this case, the trailing game ball displaces its position of attraction to the outer circumferential surface of the leading game ball due to its own weight.

When the trailing game ball is lifted from the second rolling portion 381c, it is displaced toward the inside of the recessed portion 4372Rc5, making it easier for the weight of the trailing game ball to act on the leading game ball. As a result, it becomes easier to release the adhesion between the leading game ball and the inside of the groove portion 372Rc2, as shown in FIG. 102.

As described above, when the trailing game ball is lifted from the second rolling portion 381c, it is displaced to the inside of the recessed portion 4372Rc5. In this case, the load of the trailing game ball can be applied to the leading game ball in accordance with the displacement caused when it is lifted. As a result, as shown in FIG. 102, it is easier to release the adhesion between the leading game ball and the inside of the groove portion 372Rc2.

When the rotor 4370 rotates further from the position shown in FIG. 101 with the leading game ball no longer adsorbed to the inside of the groove 372Rc2, the leading game ball and the trailing game ball fall onto the second rolling portion 381c. The leading and trailing game balls that have fallen off the rotor 5372R fall onto the upper surface of the second rolling portion 381c and roll on the second rolling portion 381c. Therefore, the leading and trailing game balls that have fallen off the rotor 5372R roll on the second rolling portion 381c and are guided into the recovery hole 373Ra formed in the inner cover 373R and are collected.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when two balls are attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R, both balls can be made to fall off from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R. In other words, if a game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R and sent to the seventh ball sending path KR7, it is advantageous for the player, but if two balls are attracted and sent, it can be a disadvantageous situation for the player, so that the result is different depending on whether only one ball is attracted or the second ball is attracted, and the player can be made to pay more attention to the game ball rolling on the sixth ball sending path KR6.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a roughly cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with its axis of rotation facing horizontally, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts gaming balls to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and the rotating member is rotated with the gaming balls attracted to the outer circumferential surface, thereby sending the gaming balls in the direction of rotation of the rotating member (in this case, when two gaming balls roll in succession toward the rotating member, the leading gaming ball (first gaming ball) is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and when the trailing gaming ball (second gaming ball) is attracted to the leading gaming ball (first gaming ball), both the leading gaming ball and the trailing gaming ball are sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating member. However, there is a problem with such gaming machines in that they are unable to sufficiently provide the player with an interest in the game.

In response to this, according to the fourth embodiment, when a leading game ball is attracted to the magnet 372Rb of the rotating body 4372R and a trailing game ball is magnetically attached to the leading game ball, a release means is provided that makes it easier to release the attraction between the magnet 372Rb of the rotating body 4372R and the leading game ball, thereby preventing both the leading game ball and the trailing game ball from being sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 4372R.

In other words, when only the leading game ball is rolled toward the rotating body 4372R and is attracted to the outer circumferential surface (magnet 372Rb) of the rotating body 4372R, the leading game ball can be sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 4372R, while in addition to the leading game ball, the trailing game ball is also rolled toward the rotating body 4372R, and the leading game ball is attracted to the outer circumferential surface (magnet 372Rb) of the rotating body 4372R and follows the leading game ball. When a game ball is attracted, both the leading game ball and the trailing game ball cannot be sent in the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R, so that when the leading game ball rolls on the second rolling portion 381c (sixth ball sending path KR6) toward the rotating body 4372R, the player can be made to worry (have his/her heart race) that another game ball (i.e., a trailing game ball) may be rolling behind the leading game ball. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, there is provided a V-winning member 382 into which game balls that are attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R and sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 4372R enter, and a recovery hole 373Ra into which game balls that are not attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R enter, and a profit is awarded to the player when the game ball enters at least the V-winning member 382, or the profit awarded to the player by the ball entering the V-winning member 382 is set to be higher than the profit awarded to the player by the ball entering the recovery hole 373Ra, which also increases the interest in the game.

In other words, the player hopes that the game ball will be attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R and sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 4372R in the hope of gaining a profit by the ball entering the V winning member 382 or of gaining a higher profit than if the ball entered the recovery hole 373Ra, and the player hopes that more game balls will be attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R and sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 4372R in the hope of gaining more opportunities to gain a profit. On the other hand, when only the leading game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R, the leading game ball can be sent in the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R (V winning member 382), but when a trailing game ball is attracted to the leading game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R, not only the trailing game ball but also the leading game ball is not sent in the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R, and both balls lose the opportunity to enter the V winning member 382. Therefore, when the leading game ball rolls toward the rotating body 4372R, it is easy to make the player worry (easier to be excited) that another game ball (i.e., a trailing game ball) is rolling behind the leading game ball, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Examples of configurations that provide a higher profit to the player include configurations in which more prize balls are paid out when a ball goes in, configurations in which the open time of the wing 312 that allows/restricts the entry of a ball into the third ball entry port (between the recess 311a and the upper front cover 313) is extended by opening and closing the wing 312 that is formed to be openable, configurations in which the number of times the wing 312 is opened is increased, and configurations in which the open range of the wing 312 is increased.

The release means is recessed into the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R and is formed as a recess 4372Rc5 that receives the trailing game ball attracted to the leading game ball, so that the trailing game ball can be brought closer to the lower side of the leading game ball in the direction of gravity, which makes it easier to increase the gravity direction component of the weight of the trailing game ball acting on the leading game ball. This makes it easier to release the attraction between the leading game ball and the magnet 372Rb.

In other words, when a trailing game ball is attracted to a leading game ball, the weight of the trailing game ball is used to release the attraction between the magnet 372Rb and the leading game ball, whereas when the trailing game ball is not attracted to the leading game ball, the attraction between the magnet 372Rb and the leading game ball is not released. Furthermore, since such switching can be achieved only by a means that utilizes the weight of the trailing game ball, i.e., the recessed portion 4372Rc5 recessed into the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R, it is not necessary to provide a displacement member or a drive source for switching, and accordingly, product costs can be reduced.

Next, the rotating body 5372R in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 103 to 106. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which when a trailing game ball sent later adheres to a leading game ball that has been adhered to groove portion 372Rc2 of rotor 372R, the leading game ball can be prevented from falling out of groove portion 372Rc2. In the fifth embodiment, a case is described in which when a trailing game ball sent later adheres to a leading game ball that has been adhered to groove portion 5372Rc2 of rotor 5372R, the leading game ball and the trailing game ball fall out of groove portion 5372Rc2.

In the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the right side rotating ball part 370R and the left side rotating ball part 370L are different in that the drive means and the transmission means for transmitting the drive are disposed in the right side rotating ball part 370R, and the other shapes are formed in line symmetry with respect to the center in the left-right direction of the variable unit 360, so a detailed description of the rotor 5372L of the left side rotating ball part 370L will be omitted.

Figure 103 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotor 5372R in the fifth embodiment, Figure 104(a) is a side view of the rotor 5372R, Figure 104(b) is a top view of the rotor 5372R, Figure 104(c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotor 5372R taken along line CIVc-CIVc in Figure 104(b), and Figure 104(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotor 5372R taken along line CIVd-CIVd in Figure 104(b).

As shown in Figures 103 and 104, the rotating body 5372R in the fifth embodiment is mainly formed with a first rotating body 372Ra arranged on the main body 380 side, a second rotating body 5372Rc connected to the first rotating body 372Ra, a magnet 372Rb having magnetic force arranged inside the second rotating body 5372Rc, and a release member 5372Rd arranged along the outer edge of the second rotating body 5372Rc.

The second rotating body 5372Rc is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter substantially the same as that of the first rotating body 372Ra, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the first rotating body 372Ra and is attached to the first rotating body 372Ra.

The second rotating body 5372Rc is formed with a groove portion 5372Rc2 recessed radially inward on the outer circumferential surface, a recess 372Rc1 formed radially inward of the groove portion 5372Rc2 and recessed into the side surface of the rotating body 5372Rc, and a recess portion 5372Rc3 formed by cutting out the portion between the recess 372Rc1 and the groove portion 5372Rc2 and the portion adjacent to the groove portion 5372Rc2.

The groove 5372Rc2 is formed with a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the radial direction of the rotor 372R, and the shape is set to be larger than the shape of the magnet 372Rb. The groove 5372Rc2 has a flat surface located on the radial inner side of the rotor 372R, and is partially cut out by the recess 5372Rc3 as described above.

The recessed portion 5372Rc3 is a space that accommodates the release member 5372Rd (described later) formed inside a notch in the rotor 5372R, and the shape of the recess is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the release member 5372Rd.

The release member 5372Rd has an outer shape that is roughly C-shaped when viewed in the radial direction of the rotor 5372R. The release member 5372Rd is mainly formed with a release portion 5372Rd1 that is arranged inside the groove portion 5372Rc2, a pressing portion 5372Rd2 that is arranged along the outer circumferential surface of the rotor 5372R, and a through hole 5372Rd3 that is located between the release portion 5372Rd1 and the pressing portion 5372Rd2 and that penetrates the rotor 5372R in the axial direction.

The release portion 5372Rd1 is disposed inside a recessed portion 5372Rc3 that is formed by cutting out the inside of the groove portion 5372Rc2, and the surface on the outer periphery of the rotor 5372R is disposed flush with the flat surface of the groove portion 5372Rc2. This allows a game ball sent inside the groove portion 5372Rc2 to be attracted by the magnetic force of the magnet 372Rb that is disposed inside the recessed portion 372Rc1.

The pressing portion 5372Rd2 is formed to protrude radially outward from the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 5372R, and the protruding tip surface is formed in a curved shape that is convex outward. In addition, the radius of the curve at the protruding tip surface of the pressing portion 5372 is set to a dimension smaller than the radius of the rotating body 5372R. This makes it easier to make the pressing portion 5372Rd2 protrude radially outward from the rotating body 5372R.

In addition, when the release member 5372Rd is not displaced (the pressing portion 5372Rd2 is not displaced radially inward relative to the rotating body 5372R), the pressing portion 5372Rd2 is set at a position where both ends in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 5327R are connected to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 5372R. In other words, it is possible to eliminate a step in the radial direction between the recessed portion 5372Rc3 of the rotating body 5372R and the pressing portion 5372Rd2. As a result, when the game ball rolls on the second rolling portion 381c, it is possible to prevent the game ball from riding on the step between the recessed portion 5372Rc3 of the rotating body 5372R and the pressing portion 5372Rd2 and being sent to the third rolling portion 381d by the rotation of the rotating body 5372R.

The through hole 5372Rd3 is a through hole into which the shaft rod JB1 is inserted. The shaft rod JB is an axis that rotatably holds the release member 5372Rd, and is inserted into the through hole 5372Rd3 of the release member 5372Rd, with one end inserted into the inside of the shaft hole 5372Rc4 recessed into the side surface of the second rotating body 5372Rc and the other end clamped to the side surface of the first rotating body 372Ra. This prevents the shaft rod JB1 from falling off the assembled rotating body 5372R, and allows the release member 5372Rd to be rotatably supported.

Next, the operation of the release member 5372Rd of the rotating body 5372R will be described with reference to Figures 105 and 106. Figures 105 and 106 are cross-sectional views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390.

Note that Figures 105 and 106 correspond to the cross sections of the variable unit 360 and rear base 390 in Figure 69. Also, Figure 106 illustrates a state in which the rotating body 5372R has been rotated slightly from the position shown in Figure 105.

As shown in FIG. 105, when two game balls are sent consecutively to the sixth ball sending path KR6, if the leading game ball is attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 5372Rc2, the leading game ball becomes magnetic due to the magnetic force of the magnet 372Rb and attracts the trailing game ball to its outer peripheral surface.

When the rotor 5372R is rotated with a trailing game ball attached to the outer circumferential surface of the leading game ball, the leading game ball is lifted upward while still attached to the outer circumferential surface of the rotor 5372R. At this time, the trailing game ball displaces its attachment position relative to the leading game ball and is displaced toward the outer circumferential surface of the rotor 5372R.

Here, the pressing portion 5372Rd2 of the release member 5372Rd disposed on the rotating body 5372R is formed in a shape such that the protruding tip abuts against the outer peripheral surface of the trailing game ball when the trailing game ball is attracted to the leading game ball and lifted from the second rolling portion 381c.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106, when the rotating body 5372R rotates from the position shown in FIG. 105 and the trailing game ball moves away (is lifted) from the second rolling portion 381c, the weight of the trailing game ball presses the pressing portion 5372Rd2 of the release member 5372Rd radially inward of the rotating body 5372R.

This displacement of the pressing portion 5372Rd2 causes the release member 5372Rd to rotate about the through hole 5372Rd3. As a result, the release portion 5372Rd1, which is formed on the opposite side of the through hole 5372Rd3 from the pressing portion 5372Rd2, is displaced radially outward of the rotating body 5372R.

As a result, the leading game ball attracted to the inner surface of groove portion 5372Rc2 is pushed outward from the inside of groove portion 5372Rc2 as release portion 5372Rd1 is displaced. Therefore, the leading game ball is displaced to a position radially outward from the rotating body 5372R, and is accordingly moved away from magnet 372Rb disposed on the inside of rotating body 5372R. As a result, the magnetic force attracting the leading game ball to the inner surface of groove portion 5372Rc2 is weakened, and the leading game ball falls off from the outer peripheral surface (groove portion 5372Rc2) of the rotating body 5372R.

In this case, as described above, the pressing portion 5372Rd2 of the release member 5372Rd disposed on the rotating body 5372R is formed in a shape such that the protruding tip abuts against the outer peripheral surface of the trailing game ball when the trailing game ball is attracted to the leading game ball and lifted from the second rolling portion 381c, so that when the trailing game ball is lifted, the force caused by its own weight to displace the trailing game ball radially inward relative to the rotating body 5372R can be maximized.

As a result, when a trailing game ball is attracted to a leading game ball and lifted from the second rolling portion 381c, the release member 5372Rd can be easily displaced, and the leading game ball can be easily dropped out of the rotating body 5372R (groove portion 5372Rc2).

The leading and trailing game balls that have fallen off the rotating body 5372R fall onto the upper surface of the second rolling portion 381c and roll on the second rolling portion 381c. Therefore, the leading and trailing game balls that have fallen off the rotating body 5372R roll on the second rolling portion 381c and are guided into the inside of the recovery hole 373Ra formed in the inner cover 373R and are collected.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when two balls are attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R, they can be dropped from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R. In other words, if a game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R and sent to the seventh ball sending path KR7, it is advantageous for the player, but if two balls are attracted, it can be a disadvantageous situation for the player, so that the result is different depending on whether only one ball or two balls are attracted, and the game ball rolling on the sixth ball sending path KR6 can be made to attract the player's attention more.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a roughly cylindrical rotating member that is formed to be rotatable with its axis of rotation facing horizontally, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts gaming balls to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and that sends the gaming balls in the direction of rotation of the rotating member by rotating the rotating member with the gaming balls attracted to the outer circumferential surface (for example, JP 2012-231890 A). In this case, when two gaming balls roll in succession toward the rotating member, the leading gaming ball (first gaming ball) is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and when the trailing gaming ball (second gaming ball) is attracted to the leading gaming ball (first gaming ball), both the leading gaming ball and the trailing gaming ball are sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating member. However, such a gaming machine has a problem in that it is not possible to sufficiently provide the player with an interest in the game.

In contrast, according to the fifth embodiment, when a leading game ball is attracted to the magnet 372Rb of the rotating body 5372R and a trailing game ball is magnetically attached to the leading game ball, a release means is provided that makes it easier to release the attraction between the magnet 372Rb of the rotating body 5372R and the leading game ball, thereby preventing both the leading game ball and the trailing game ball from being sent in the rotational direction of the rotating body 5372R.

In other words, when only the leading game ball rolls toward the rotating body 5372R and is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet 372Rb) of the rotating body 5372R, the leading game ball can be sent in the rotation direction of the rotating body 5372R, whereas when in addition to the leading game ball, a trailing game ball also rolls toward the rotating body 5372R and the leading game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet 372Rb) of the rotating body 5372R and the trailing game ball is attracted to the leading game ball, both the leading game ball and the trailing game ball cannot be sent in the rotation direction of the rotating body 5372R. Therefore, when the leading game ball rolls toward the rotating body 5372R, the player can be made to worry (feel excited) that another game ball (i.e., a trailing game ball) may be rolling behind the leading game ball. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, there is provided a V-winning member 382 into which game balls that are attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R and sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 5372R enter, and a recovery hole 373Ra into which game balls that are not attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R enter, and a profit is awarded to the player when the game ball enters at least the V-winning member 382, or the profit awarded to the player by the ball entering the V-winning member 382 is set to be higher than the profit awarded to the player by the ball entering the recovery hole 373Ra, which also increases the interest in the game.

In other words, the player hopes that the game ball will be attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R and sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 5372R in the hope of gaining a profit by the ball entering the V winning member 382 or of gaining a higher profit than if the ball entered the recovery hole 373Ra, and the player hopes that more game balls will be attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R and sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 5372R in the hope of gaining more opportunities to gain a profit. On the other hand, when only the leading game ball is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 5372R, the leading game ball can be sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 5372R (V winning member 382), while when a trailing game ball is attracted to the leading game ball attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 5372R, not only the trailing game ball but also the leading game ball is not sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 5372R, and both balls lose the opportunity to enter the V winning member 382. Therefore, when the leading game ball rolls toward the rotating body 5372R, it is easy to make the player worry (easily excited) that another game ball (i.e., a trailing game ball) is rolling behind the leading game ball, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

The form in which the player receives a high profit is the same as in the fourth embodiment, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

The release means includes a release member 5372Rd that is displaceably disposed on the rotor 5372R, and the release member 5372Rd is displaced by contact with a trailing game ball that is attracted to a leading game ball, and the displacement increases the distance between the leading game ball and the magnet 372Rb. Therefore, when a trailing game ball is attracted to a leading game ball, the weight of the trailing game ball is used to release the attraction between the magnet 372Rb and the leading game ball, while when the trailing game ball is not attracted to the leading game ball, the attraction between the magnet 372Rb and the leading game ball is not released. In addition, because such switching is performed using the weight of the trailing game ball, it is not necessary to provide a drive source for displacing the release member 5372Rd, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

That is, according to the fifth embodiment, there is no need to arrange a biasing member (e.g., a torsion spring, etc.) for switching the release member 5372Rd. For example, even if the release portion 5372Rd1 of the release member 5372Rd is in a state of protruding radially outward from the groove portion 5372Rc2, the release portion 5372Rd1 can be displaced radially inward of the rotating body 5372R by pressing the game ball (the preceding game ball) against the inside of the groove portion 5372Rc2 by a suction action. As a result, the protruding tip of the pressing portion 5372Rd2 can be displaced radially outward of the rotating body 5372R. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a drive source for displacing the release member 5372Rd, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Next, the winning port unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 107 and 108. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, a case was described in which the game ball sent inside the second through holes 631b, 633b formed on the left and right sides of the base plate 630 is sent directly to the inside of the path member 640 arranged on the back surface of the base plate 630. In the sixth embodiment, a case is described in which the game ball sent inside the second through holes 631b, 633b formed on the left and right sides of the base plate 630 passes through a sensor device SE1 that detects the passage of the game ball before being sent to the inside of the path member 640 arranged on the back surface of the base plate 630.

Figure 107(a) is a front view of the winning port unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, and Figure 107(b) is a rear view of the winning port unit 6600. Figure 108 is an exploded oblique front view of the winning port unit 6600.

As shown in Figures 107 and 108, in the sixth embodiment of the winning port unit 6600, a sensor device SE1 is interposed between the opposing base plate 630 and the path member 640. In addition, the sensor device SE1 is disposed at a position on the rear side of the second through holes 631b and 633b, respectively.

The sensor device SE1 has an opening SE1a formed therethrough that is larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and is interposed between the opposing base plate 630 and the path member 640 with the opening SE1a open in the front-to-rear direction. The sensor device SE1 can detect the passage of the game ball by passing the game ball inside the opening SE1a.

Note that the game balls flowing down inside the winning slot unit 6600 are reversed on the left and right sides, so in the following explanation, we will only explain the game balls flowing down the left side of the game board 13, and will omit an explanation of the game balls flowing down the right side of the game board 13.

Next, we will explain what happens when a game ball flows down inside the winning port unit 6600. When a game ball flows down the playing area of the game board 13, flows down near the left winning port 26 and into the space facing the left recess 631 and the left cover member 611, it is guided to the bottom surface of the left recess 631 and sent inside the second through hole 631b.

In this case, as described above, the sensor device SE1 is disposed on the back side of the second through hole 631b, so that the game ball that flows down between the opposing left recess 631 and the left cover member 611 is detected by the sensor device SE1 and then sent to the inside of the path member 640. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the game ball sent to the inside of the path member 640 can be detected.

Therefore, by controlling the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 to protrude forward after a predetermined time has elapsed after the sensor device SE1 detects a gaming ball, the gaming ball passing through the path member 640 can be easily sent to the top of the variable plate 652. As a result, the gaming ball passing through the path member 640 can be easily sent to the through hole 632a.

For example, by setting the above-mentioned predetermined time to be approximately the same as the time it takes for the game ball to roll from one end to the other along the first path 641 of the path member 640, the game ball can be more easily sent to the upper part of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650. As a result, it is possible to give a game ball that does not win at the left winning port 26 and flows down the road the possibility of winning again at the through hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the flow of the game ball downstream, and the time for which the player is kept focused on the game ball can be extended.

Thus, according to this embodiment, a sensor device SE1 is provided that detects a game ball flowing down the path member 640, and a drive means is provided that drives the variable plate 652. When a game ball is detected by the detection member, the variable plate 652 is driven by the drive means to protrude toward the front side of the game board, making it easier for the game ball to enter the through hole 632a. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the left start winning hole 26 or the right start winning hole 27, the player can be drawn to the flow of the game ball, and continue to have hope that the ball will enter the through hole 632a. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

The detection of the game ball by the sensor device SE1 and the driving by the driving means (protruding the variable plate 652) may be performed simultaneously, or driving may start a predetermined time after the detection. In the latter case, however, it is preferable that the driving (protruding operation of the variable plate 652) is completed before the game ball reaches the protruding position of the variable plate 652. This is because the function of the variable plate 652 to guide the game ball to the through hole 632a (making it easier to enter the ball) can be reliably performed.

For example, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 may be set to protrude to the front side depending on the number of game balls passing through the sensor device SE1. In this case, when a predetermined number of game balls consecutively flow down the vicinity of the left winning opening 26 without entering the left winning opening 26, the player can be given the possibility of winning through the through hole 632a. Therefore, the value of shooting a game ball into the playing area of the game board 13 aiming at the left winning opening 26 can be increased. Therefore, since the player can be made to perform the action of shooting the game ball into the playing area of the game board 13 aiming at a predetermined location, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the path of the game ball. As a result, the player can be made to search for a more advantageous position to shoot the game ball into the playing area of the game board 13, which makes it easier to give the player interest.

For example, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is set to protrude forward when five game balls pass through the sensor device SE1. In this case, when five consecutive game balls do not enter the left winning opening 26 but flow nearby, the player can be given the possibility that at least one of the balls will win through the through hole 632a.

In this case, when three game balls (fewer than the predetermined number of balls) have passed through sensor device SE1, if the fourth game ball enters the left winning opening 26, the tally of the number of balls that have passed through sensor device SE1 may be reset. This makes it possible to prevent game balls from consecutively winning the winning opening 26 and through hole 632a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing parts 312, which open when game balls enter the winning opening 26 and through hole 632a, from opening consecutively. As a result, it is possible to disperse the timing of the opening of the wing parts 312, which gives the player an advantage, and thus to prevent the player's interest from declining.

Next, the winning port unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 109 to 111. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is positioned at the rear, the possibility of the game ball winning through the through hole 632a is reduced. In the seventh embodiment, however, even when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is positioned at the rear, two game balls in a row are more likely to win through the through hole 632a. Note that the state in which the variable plate 652 is positioned at the rear refers to the state in which the variable plate 652 is sunk into the rear side of the game board 13.

First, the winning port unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 109 and 110. Figure 109 is a front view of the winning port unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment. Figure 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning port unit 7600.

As shown in Figures 109 and 110, the winning port unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment is mainly formed by a decorative plate 7610 having multiple winning ports 26, 27, 28, a base plate 630 arranged opposite the decorative plate 7610 and forming a flow path for game balls between the opposing plates, a path member 640 forming a sending path for game balls between the base plate 630, and a variable winning device 650 arranged on the base plate 630 and guiding the game balls flowing between the opposing plates 7610 and 630 to the through hole 632a.

The decorative panel 7610 is formed from a left cover member 611 with a left start winning opening 26, a right cover member 612 with a right start winning opening 27, and a central cover member 7613 with a central start winning opening 28.

The central cover member 7613 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally long and rectangular when viewed from the front, and is disposed in the center of the left cover member 611 and the right cover member 612. A through hole 7613e that penetrates from the front side to the rear side is formed in the central cover member 7613.

The through holes 7613e are formed in front of the two connecting holes 632b formed in the base plate 630 arranged opposite the central cover member 7613. The connecting holes 632b are formed so that the width dimension opening in the left-right direction when viewed from the front (left-right direction in FIG. 109) is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and are formed so that the game ball can pass through the inside.

The through hole 7613e is formed so that its center position is shifted outward in the left-right direction relative to the base plate 630 from the left-right center position of the connecting hole 632b, and a part of the inner edge on the base plate 630 side is formed in a position overlapping in the front-rear direction with the left-right center position of the connecting hole 632b.

Furthermore, the through hole 7613e is recessed in a curved (spherical) shape that is convex from the rear side to the front side (i.e., the recessed depth increases as it moves away from the through hole 632a), and the inner diameter of the hole on the front side is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the through hole 7613e is formed to a size that does not allow the game ball to pass through.

Next, referring to Figure 111, we will explain the game balls flowing down the winning port unit 7600. Figures 111(a) to 111(c) are cross-sectional views of the winning port unit 7600 taken along line CXI-CXI in Figure 109.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), two game balls are sent consecutively inside the path member 640, and the leading game ball is sent from inside the connecting hole 632b to the central cover member 7613 side. In this case, as described above, the center position of the through hole 7613e is formed at a position shifted outward in the left-right direction from the left-right center position of the connecting hole 632b relative to the base plate 630, and a part of the inner edge on the base plate 630 side is formed at a position overlapping in the front-rear direction with the left-right center position of the connecting hole 632b. Therefore, the leading game ball is sent to a position slightly shifted left-right from the center of the through hole 7613e.

As a result, the leading game ball is guided to the inner edge of the through hole 7613e as shown in FIG. 111(b), and its position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 111(b)) is displaced to the center position of the through hole 7613e. In addition, at this time, the through hole 7613e is recessed in a convex curve from the back side to the front side of the central cover member 7613 (i.e., as a recess with the connecting hole 632b side open), making it easier to retain the leading game ball on its inner edge.

Next, when a trailing game ball connected to the leading game ball is sent from inside the connecting hole 632b toward the central cover member 7613, the leading game ball is guided to the inner edge of the through hole 7613e formed in the central cover member 7613, and is displaced outward in the left-right direction relative to the base plate 630, causing the trailing game ball to collide with the central spherical surface of the base plate 630 of the leading game ball.

As a result, the trailing game ball can be collided with the curved surface (spherical surface) of the leading game ball on the left-right center side of the base plate 630, and the repulsive force generated in the trailing game ball by the collision can be directed toward the left-right center side (through hole 632a side) of the base plate 630. As a result, as shown in FIG. 111, the trailing game ball can be sent to the left-right center side (through hole 632a side) of the base plate 630 and entered the through hole 632a.

The leading game ball falls out of the through hole 7613e due to its own weight, and flows downward to be collected from the outlet 71 formed in the game board 13.

In this way, in the seventh embodiment, when there are two or more game balls that flow near the left and right starting winning holes 26, 27 without winning, the following game balls can be made to easily win the through hole 632a by passing continuously inside the path member 640.

That is, a gaming machine equipped with a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance is known. In this case, a gaming ball that does not enter the first ball entrance does not enter the second ball entrance, but is only collected from the out hole. Therefore, if a gaming ball aimed at the first ball entrance does not enter the first ball entrance, the player cannot have any expectations about the subsequent fate of the gaming ball (the gaming ball flowing down). This causes a problem in that it is not possible to provide sufficient interest to the player.

In contrast, the seventh embodiment includes a route member 640 that forms a passage for game balls that do not enter the left and right starting winning openings 26, 27 and flow down, and a modification means (through hole 7613e) that makes it easier for game balls to enter through hole 632a when two game balls pass through route member 640 than when one game ball, which is less than two, passes through route member 640. Therefore, even if a game ball does not enter the left and right starting winning openings 26, 27, the player is directed to the game ball flowing down, and can continue to have hope that the ball will enter through hole 632a. In particular, the ease of balls entering the through-hole 632a changes depending on the number of game balls passing through the path member 640 (if two or more game balls do not enter the starting winning holes 26, 27 and flow down nearby them, a favorable situation can be created for the player), so the player can also focus on the number of game balls that have missed entering the left and right starting winning holes 26, 27. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Examples of the path member 640 include a closed passage through which the game ball can pass, a path formed by one or more nails that determine the direction in which the game ball flows down, and a slope (open path) along which the game ball can roll.

The change means also includes a restricting means for restricting the flow of the preceding game ball passing through the path member 640 or flowing out from the path member 640, and the restricting means is formed so that when the preceding game ball is followed (connected) by the following game ball, the following game ball abuts (collides) with the preceding game ball whose flow is restricted, and the flow direction of the following game ball is directed toward the through hole 632a, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In other words, it is easier for the ball to enter the through hole 632a when the preceding game ball and the following game ball flow down than when only the preceding game ball flows down (the ease of ball entry into the through hole 632a can be changed depending on the number of game balls passing through the path member 640), so that the player can also focus on the number of game balls that have not entered the left and right starting winning holes 26, 27. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, since the regulating means is formed as a through hole 7613e recessed into the wall surface facing the outlet of the path member 640, the leading game ball flowing out from the outlet of the path member 640 can be received in the through hole 7613e and the flow of the leading game ball can be temporarily regulated (i.e., the leading game ball can be temporarily held so that the trailing game ball can collide with it), while the restriction on the flow of the leading game ball can be released by the leading game ball dropping (flowing down) from the through hole 7613e due to its own weight. Therefore, the flow of the leading game ball can be restricted (held) and released just by the shape of the regulating means, and an operating mechanism for switching between these (releasing the restriction) is not required, so the structure can be simplified and product costs can be reduced.

In addition, even if there is no component (e.g., a variable plate 652 having a rolling surface that is inclined downward toward the through hole 632a, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the through hole 632a by rolling the game ball on the rolling surface) that guides the game ball flowing out from the exit of the path member 640 to the through hole 632a (the variable plate 652 is formed so as to be displaceable between a position where it can be guided to the through hole 632a and a position where it cannot be guided, and is displaced to the position where it cannot be guided), the following game ball can be made to enter the through hole 632a by using the through hole 7613e.

Furthermore, the connecting hole 632b has a bottom surface along which the game ball rolls and side wall surfaces erected opposite both sides of the bottom surface in the width direction, and the distance between the opposing side wall surfaces is set to a dimension approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball, so that the trajectory of the game ball flowing out from the outlet of the path member 640 can be made approximately constant, and the game ball can be reliably received by the regulating means (through hole 7613e).

In addition, the through hole 7613e is recessed deeper in the direction away from the through hole 632a, so that the game ball received in the through hole 7613e can be held by shifting its position in the direction in which the recessed depth becomes deeper (i.e., the side away from the through hole 632a). Therefore, when a trailing game ball abuts (collides) with the preceding game ball held in the through hole 7613e, the trailing game ball can be directed toward the through hole 632a, making it easier for the trailing game ball to enter the through hole.

Furthermore, the variable plate 652 is provided, which is formed so as to be able to retract and protrude, and is disposed at a position between the exit of the path member 640 and the through hole 7613e, and below the direction of gravity. When the variable plate 652 is protruded, the variable plate 652 is formed so as to be able to guide the game ball to the through hole 632a, so that the preceding game ball held in the through hole 7613e can be made to enter the through hole 632a using the protruding variable plate 652. In other words, when the preceding game ball falls out (drops) from the through hole 7613e, the preceding game ball can be received by the variable plate 652, and can be guided to the through hole 632a by the variable plate 652. As a result, the preceding game ball can be made to enter the through hole 632a.

Next, the winning port unit 8600 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 112 to 116. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, a case was described in which the possibility of a game ball winning through the through hole 632a was reduced when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 was positioned at the rear. However, in the eighth embodiment, even when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is positioned at the rear, it is made easier for two game balls to win through the through hole 632a when sent along the path member 8640 in a row.

Figure 112 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning port unit 8600 in the eighth embodiment. Figure 113(a) is a front view of the path member 8640, and Figure 113(b) is a cross-sectional view of the path member 8640 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in Figure 113(a).

In FIG. 113, the storage section 8643 formed in the pathway member 8640 is omitted. Also, in FIG. 113, the connection hole 632b and the second connection hole 8632e of the base plate 630 disposed on the front side of the pathway member 8640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.

As shown in Figures 112 and 113, the winning port unit 8600 in the eighth embodiment is mainly formed with a decorative plate 610 having multiple winning ports 26, 27, and 28, a base plate 630 arranged opposite the decorative plate 610 and forming a flow path for game balls between them, a path member 8640 forming a ball sending path between the base plate 630, and a variable winning device 650 arranged on the base plate 8630 and guiding the game balls flowing between the decorative plate 610 and the base plate 630 to one of the winning ports 26, 27, and 28.

In the eighth embodiment, a second connecting hole 8632e is formed in the base plate 8630 at the midpoint between the two connecting holes 632b, penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening of the second connecting hole 8632e is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, allowing the game ball to pass through it.

The path member 8640 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a roughly box shape with the base plate 8630 side open. The path member 8640 is a member for forming a path connecting the left and right second through holes 631b, 633b formed in the base plate 8630 and the connecting hole 632b or the second connecting hole 8632e, and is formed from a first path 8641 formed on the left side when viewed from the front and connecting the second through hole 631b and the connecting hole 632b or the second connecting hole 8632e on the left side when viewed from the front of the base plate 630, and a second path 8642 formed on the right side when viewed from the front and connecting the second through hole 633b and the connecting hole 632b or the second connecting hole 8632e on the right side when viewed from the front of the base plate 630.

In addition, the path member 8640 is provided with a path switching member 8644 disposed midway along each of the first path 8641 and the second path 8642, which switches the path for sending the game ball rolling along the first path 8641 to the front of the base plate 8630 to the connecting hole 632b or the second connecting hole 8632e.

The path switching member 8644 is housed inside a box-shaped storage section 8643 that is formed contiguous with the underside of the path member 8640 (see FIG. 112). The storage section 8643 is also formed with an open front side (the base plate 8630 side). As a result, by forming the decorative plate 610 and the base plate 8630 from a transparent material, the player can visually confirm the path switching of the path switching member 8644. As a result, it is easier to draw attention to the rolling of the game ball, making it easier to arouse the player's interest.

Next, the path switching member 8644 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 113. Note that since the path switching members 8644 formed on the first path 8641 and the second path 8642 are formed symmetrically, only the path switching member 8644 on the left side will be described, and the description of the path switching member 8644 on the right side will be omitted.

The path switching member 8644 is formed mainly by a variable plate 8644a that is arranged on the same plane as the bottom surface of the first path 8641 (the surface on which the game ball rolls), a transmission member 8644b that has one end arranged below the variable plate 8644a and a central portion rotatably supported by the storage portion 8643, and a regulating member 8644c that is arranged above the other end of the transmission member 8644b and a central portion rotatably supported by the storage portion 8643.

The variable plate 8644a is formed of a plate member that is rectangular when viewed from above and has a constant plate thickness. The upper surface of the variable plate 8644a forms part of the bottom surface of the first path 8641 (it is arranged on the same plane as the bottom surface of the path member 8640). That is, the variable plate 8644a is arranged in a position that slopes downward from the outer side in the left-right direction of the path member 8640 toward the center in the left-right direction, just like the bottom surface of the path member 8640. This allows the game ball sent to the first path 8641 to flow downward.

The variable plate 8644a is mainly formed with a through hole 8644a2 that penetrates in the front-rear direction on one end side, and a contact plate 8644a1 that protrudes in an arc shape from the underside on the other end side.

A cylindrical rod member (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 8644a2. Therefore, by attaching the rod member to the storage portion 8643, the variable plate 8644a can be rotatably supported on the path member 8640. In addition, a biasing spring (not shown) is disposed between the variable plate 8644a and the storage portion 8643, and the variable plate 8644a is positioned such that its upper surface is flush with the bottom surface of the path member 8640 under normal conditions.

The transmission member 8644b is formed in a rectangular column shape, with one end side being positioned in contact with the contact plate 8644a1 of the variable plate 8644a, and the other end side being positioned in contact with the bottom surface of the other end side of the regulating member 8644c described later.

The transmission member 8644b is arranged in the housing 8643 so as to be rotatable about the axis at the central position, and can be displaced by displacing the variable plate 8644a.

The restricting member 8644c is formed in a rectangular column shape extending to one side, and is provided with a first protrusion 8644c1 and a second protrusion 8644c2 protruding upward from the upper surface of each of the one end side and the other end side. The restricting member 8644c is also disposed in the accommodation portion 8643 in a state in which it can rotate at its intermediate position. As a result, the restricting member 8644c can displace the positions of the first protrusion 8644c1 and the second protrusion 8644c2 by displacing.

The first protrusion 8644c1 is disposed so as to be insertable through a through hole formed in the first path 8641 of the path member 8640 in the direction of gravity. In addition, in the normal state (when the variable plate 8644a is before displacement (flush with the first path 8641)), the tip of the first protrusion 8644c1 is positioned above the first path 8641 by a biasing spring (not shown).

Furthermore, the protruding position of the first protrusion 8641c1 is a position that overlaps in the front-rear direction with the side of the connecting hole 632b on the downstream side of the first path 8641 (the center of the path member 860), and is at the center position in the front-rear direction of the first path 8641. This allows the game ball rolling on the first path 8641 to abut against the first protrusion 8641c1, pass through the connecting hole 632b, and be sent forward of the base plate 8630.

The distance between the tip surface of the first protrusion 8644c1 and the opposing inner peripheral surface of the pathway member 8640 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball flowing down the first pathway 8641 is prevented from climbing over the first protrusion 8644c1.

The second protrusion 8644c2 is disposed so as to be able to pass through the inner circumferential surface of a notch formed in the first path 8641 of the path member 8640. Furthermore, in the normal state (the state in which the variable plate 8644a is before displacement (flush with the first path 8641)), the second protrusion 8644c2 is disposed so that its tip is flush with the first path 8641. Therefore, in the normal state, the game ball rolling on the first path 8641 can be prevented from being obstructed by the second protrusion 8644c2.

On the other hand, when the restricting member 8644c is displaced and the second protrusion 8644c2 is positioned above the first path 8641, the tip surface of the second protrusion 8644c2 is positioned flush with the first path 8641.

As a result, the game ball rolling on the first path 8641 can flow downward without being restricted by the second protrusion 8644c2, and is sent forward of the base plate 8630 through the second connecting hole 8632e.

In this case, the protruding position of the second protrusion 8644c2 is set on the rear side of the connecting hole 632b, and the front-rear position is set at the end on the connecting hole 632b side. This makes the distance dimension between one end of the connecting hole and the second protrusion 8644c2 smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, preventing the game ball rolling on the first path 8641 from passing through the connecting hole 632b.

Next, referring to FIG. 114, the flow of a game ball when it is sent to the first path 8641 will be described. FIG. 114(a) is a front view of the path member 8640, and FIG. 114(b) is a cross-sectional view of the path member 8640.

In addition, in FIG. 114, the storage section 8643 formed in the path member 8640 is omitted. Also, in FIG. 114, the connection hole 632b and the second connection hole 8632e of the base plate 630 arranged on the front side of the path member 8640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. Furthermore, the cross-sectional view of FIG. 114(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 112(b).

As shown in FIG. 114, when one game ball is sent from the through hole 631b (see FIG. 112) to the path member 8640, the game ball rolls due to the inclination of the first path 8641 and rolls toward the connecting hole 632b.

The rolling game ball rolls from the first path 8641 over the top of the variable plate 8644a, rolls toward the connecting hole 632b, and abuts against the first protrusion 8644c1 protruding from the back side of the connecting hole 632b, and is sent to the connecting hole 632b. In other words, when one game ball is sent into the first path 8641, the game ball can be sent to the front of the base plate 8630 by passing through the connecting hole 632b.

Next, referring to Figures 115 and 116, we will explain the case where two game balls flow down the first path 8641 in succession. Figures 115(a) and 116(a) are front views of the path member 8640, and Figures 115(b) and 116(b) are cross-sectional views of the path member 8640.

In addition, in Fig. 115 and Fig. 116, the storage portion 8643 formed in the path member 8640 is omitted. Also, in Fig. 115, the connection hole 632b and the second connection hole 8632e of the base plate 630 arranged on the front side of the path member 8640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. Furthermore, the cross-sectional views of Fig. 115(b) and Fig. 116(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of Fig. 112(b).

As shown in FIG. 115, when two game balls are sent consecutively from the through hole 631b (see FIG. 112) to the path member 8640, the game balls roll due to the inclination of the first path 8641 and are rolled toward the connecting hole 632b.

The rolling game ball rolls from the first path 8641 over the upper part of the variable plate 8644a. At this time, the gravity of the rolling game ball is made greater than the biasing force of the biasing spring attached to the variable plate 8644a. As a result, when two game balls are placed on the variable plate 8644a, the variable plate 8644a can be displaced.

When the variable plate 8644a is displaced, the abutment plate 8644a1 formed on the variable plate 8644a is displaced downward in accordance with the displacement of the variable plate 8644a. Therefore, one end of the transmission member 8644b that abuts against the tip of the abutment plate 8644a1 is displaced downward, and the transmission member 8644b is rotated. This rotational displacement of the transmission member 8644b displaces the other side of the transmission member 8644b upward, and one side of the regulating member 8644c arranged above the other side of the transmission member 8644b is displaced upward. As a result, the first protrusion 8644c1 of the regulating member 8644c is displaced downward, and the second protrusion 8644c2 is displaced upward.

When the second protrusion 8644c2 protrudes upward, the game ball can roll along the first path 8641 and to the rear side of the second connecting hole 8632e as described above. Therefore, of the two game balls, the leading game ball can be sent from the second connecting hole 8632e to the front side of the base plate 8630.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116, when the leading game ball moves from the top of the variable plate 8644a onto the first path 8641, which is closer to the connecting hole 632b than the variable plate 8644a, the force of the spring attached to the variable plate 8644a becomes greater than the gravity of the game ball, and the second protrusion 8644c2 is released from its upward position and displaced to a position where the first protrusion 8644c1 is upward.

In this case, the preceding game ball has rolled to a position closer to the second connecting hole 8632e than the first protrusion 8644c1, so it can pass through the second connecting hole 8632e and be sent forward of the base plate 8630 as described above.

On the other hand, the trailing game ball is positioned above the variable plate 8644a, so it abuts against the first protrusion 8644c1 and is sent toward the connecting hole 632b. That is, the trailing game ball passes through the connecting hole 632b and is sent forward of the base plate 8630.

In this way, the guide means for guiding the game ball includes a variable plate 8644a along which the game ball passing through the path member 8640 rolls, and a regulating member 8644c that is interlockingly connected to the variable plate 8644a and is formed so as to be displaceable between a first position (position shown in FIG. 113(a)) and a second position (position shown in FIG. 115(a)) to change the course of the game ball passing through the path member 8640. When the regulating member 8644c is displaced to the second position, , the path of the game ball is easier to enter the through hole 632a than the path of the game ball when displaced to the first position, and when a first number of game balls roll on the variable plate 8644a, the regulating member 8644c is displaced to the second position, and when a second number of game balls (in this embodiment, one ball) that is less than the first number (in this embodiment, two balls) roll on the variable plate 8644a, the regulating member 8644c is displaced to the first position, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In other words, it is easier for the balls to enter the through hole 632a when a first number of game balls, which is a number greater than the second number, flow down than when a second number of game balls flow down (the ease of ball entry into the through hole 632a can be changed depending on the number of game balls passing through the path member 8640), so the player can also focus on the number of game balls that have not been able to enter the first ball entry port (the left and right starting entry ports 26, 27). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the regulating member 8644c is arranged downstream of the variable plate 8644a, the direction (path) of a given game ball can be related to the number and sequence of game balls following the given game ball, thereby making the game more interesting. That is, when the following game balls are connected (that is, in this embodiment, when three or more game balls are connected), while the number of game balls rolling on the variable plate 8644a is maintained at the first number, the regulating member 8644c is maintained at the second position, and each game ball that has reached the regulating member 8644c can be easily inserted into the through hole 632a. On the other hand, when the series of following game balls is broken and the number of game balls rolling on the variable plate 8644a becomes equal to or less than the second number, the regulating member 8644c is displaced to the first position, and each game ball that has reached the regulating member 8644c can be more difficult to enter into the through hole 632a than in the above-mentioned case (when the regulating member 8644c is displaced to the second position). Therefore, the player can also pay attention to the number of following game balls and how they are connected. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the prize winning port unit 9600 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 117 to 122. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, a case was described in which the possibility of a game ball winning through the through hole 632a was reduced when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 was positioned at the rear. However, in the ninth embodiment, even when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is positioned at the rear, it is made easier for a game ball to win through the through hole 632a when sent through multiple path members 9640.

Figure 117 is a front view of the winning port unit 9600 in the ninth embodiment, and Figure 118 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning port unit 9600. Note that in Figure 117, the decorative plate 610 is omitted, and the outline of the path member 9640 arranged on the back side is shown by a dashed line.

As shown in Figures 117 and 118, the winning port unit 9600 in the ninth embodiment is mainly formed by a decorative plate 610 having a plurality of winning ports 26, 27, 28, a base plate 9630 arranged opposite the decorative plate 610 and forming a flow path for game balls between the opposing plates, a path member 9640 forming a sending path for game balls between the base plate 9630, and a variable winning device 650 arranged on the base plate 9630 and guiding the game balls flowing between the opposing plates 610 and 9630 to the through hole 632a.

In the ninth embodiment, a second connecting hole 8632e is formed in the base plate 9630 at the midpoint between the two connecting holes 632b, penetrating in the front-rear direction. The second connecting hole 8632e is also positioned lower than the connecting hole 632b.

The path member 9640 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a generally box shape that is open on the side of the base plate 8630. The path member 8640 is a member for forming a path that connects the second through holes 631b, 633b formed in the base plate 8630 to the connecting hole 632b or the second connecting hole 8632e.

The path member 9640 is mainly composed of a first path 9641 formed on the left side in front view and connecting the second through hole 631b and the connecting hole 632b on the left side in front view of the base plate 9630, a third path 9645 formed below the first path 9641 and connecting the first path 9641 and the second connecting hole 8632e, a second path 9642 formed on the right side in front view and connecting the second through hole 633b and the connecting hole 632b on the right side in front view of the base plate 9630, and a fourth path 9646 formed below the second path 9642 and connecting the second path 9642 and the second connecting hole 8632e.

In addition, the path member 9640 has a path switching member 9644 disposed midway along each of the first path 9641 and the second path 9642, which switches the rolling path of the game ball rolling along the first path 9641 or the second path 9642 to the third path or the fourth path 9646.

Next, the pathway member 9640 will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119(a) and FIG. 119(b) are front views of the pathway member 9640. In FIG. 119, the second through holes 631b, 633b, the connecting hole 632b, and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 9630 arranged in front of the pathway member 9640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 119, the path switching member 9644 disposed on the path member 9640 is composed of a variable plate 9644a formed from a plate-like body. The variable plate 9644a is disposed (axially supported) on the path member 9640 in a rotatable state at one end (the end at which the game ball rolls (the connecting hole 632b side)), and a biasing spring (not shown) is disposed between the variable plate 9644a and the path member 9640, with the other end being biased upward.

The variable plate 9644a is disposed with its upper surface positioned on the same plane as the rolling surface of the first path 9641 or the second path 9642 (see FIG. 119(a)). When a force greater than the biasing force of the biasing spring is applied from the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the variable plate 944a, the variable plate 944a is rotated and displaced to a position in which the other end side is inclined downward toward the third path 9645 or the fourth path 9646 (see FIG. 119(b)).

Next, referring to FIG. 120, a case where one game ball is sent to the path member 9640 will be described. FIG. 120(a) and FIG. 120(b) are front views of the path member 9640. In FIG. 120, the second through holes 631b, 633b, the connecting hole 632b, and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 9630 arranged in front of the path member 9640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. In addition, FIG. 120(a) and FIG. 120(b) sequentially illustrate the transition states as the game ball rolls inside the path member 9640.

Furthermore, in the following, since the rolling of the game ball sent from the second through holes 631b, 633b is only in the opposite rolling direction, only the game ball rolling on the left side will be described, and the description of the game ball rolling on the right side will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 120(a) and 120(b), when a single game ball is sent from the second through hole 631b to the inside of the path member 9640, it rolls on the first path 9641 and the variable plate 9644a and is sent to the connecting hole 632b. In other words, when a single game ball is sent to the path member 9640, the game ball can be sent to the front side of the base plate 9630 by passing through the connecting hole 632b.

Next, referring to Fig. 121 and Fig. 122, a case where two game balls are sent to the path member 9640 will be described. Fig. 121(a) and Fig. 121(b) are front views of the winning port unit 9600, and Fig. 122(a) and Fig. 122(b) are front views of the winning port unit 9600. In Fig. 121 and Fig. 122, the second through holes 631b, 633b, the connecting hole 632b, and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 9630 arranged in front of the path member 9640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. In Fig. 121 to Fig. 122, the transition states when the game balls roll inside the path member 9640 are illustrated in sequence.

As shown in Figures 122(a) and 122(b), when two or more game balls are sent from the second through hole 631b to the inside of the path member 9640, the other end of the variable plate 9644a rotates downward when the two game balls roll from the first path 9641 to the upper surface of the variable plate 9644a.

In other words, the force biasing the variable plate 9644a is set to be greater than the load that one game ball exerts on the upper surface of the variable plate 9644a, and is set to be less than the load that two game balls exert on the upper surface. This allows the variable plate 9644a to be displaced only when two game balls are rolling on the upper surface of the variable plate 9644a.

When the variable plate 9644a is displaced, the other end of the variable plate 9644a is displaced to the upper surface of the third path 9645 as described above, and the game ball can be sent to the third path 9645.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), when two game balls are sent to the third path 9645, the load on the upper surface of the variable plate 9644a is eliminated, and the variable plate 9644a is displaced by the biasing force, and the other end side is displaced upward (to the position before the game balls were sent).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 122(b), the game ball sent to the third path 9645 becomes capable of being sent to the second connecting hole 8632 side. As a result, the two game balls roll along the third path 9645 and are sent from the second connecting hole 8632 to the front side of the base plate 9630.

In other words, when two game balls are sent consecutively to the path member 9640, both balls can pass through the second connecting hole 8632 and be sent to the front side of the base plate 9630.

Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, when two or more consecutive game balls do not enter the left start winning hole 26 but flow down the vicinity of it, it is possible to give the player the possibility of both balls entering the winning hole. As a result, it is possible to easily provide the player with an interest.

Next, the path switching member 10670 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 123 to 130. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the path switching between the first path 9641 and the third path 9645 is performed by the load of the game ball is described. In the tenth embodiment, the case where the path switching between the second path 10642 and the third path 10643 is performed by the displacement of the path switching member 10670 and magnetic force is described.

First, the configuration of the path switching member 10670 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123(a) is a top view of the path switching member 10670 in the tenth embodiment, FIG. 123(b) is a front view of the path switching member 10670, and FIG. 123(c) is an exploded perspective front view of the path switching member 10670.

As shown in FIG. 123, the path switching member 10670 is mainly formed with a cylindrical base member 10671 and a plurality of magnets 10672 arranged inside the base member 10671.

The base member 10671 is mainly composed of a lower base member 10671b that is disposed on the lower side in the direction of gravity and has a recessed interior, and an upper base member 10671a that is disposed on top of the lower base member 10671b.

The lower base member 10671b is formed mainly with a groove portion 10671b1 recessed radially inward on its outer circumferential surface, a recess portion 10671b2 recessed axially from the upper surface side inside the groove portion 10671b1, and a through hole 10671b3 formed through the axis.

The grooves 10671b1 are formed at multiple locations (four locations in this embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the lower base member 10671b. The grooves 10671b1 are surfaces that attract the game ball to their inner surface by the magnetic force of the magnet 10672 described below, and are recessed with a width smaller than the outer shape of the game ball.

The recess 10671b2 is a hole that houses the magnet 10672 described below, and is recessed to a shape larger than the outer shape of the magnet 10672. This allows the magnet 10672 to be housed inside.

The through hole 10671b3 is a hole into which the shaft of a drive motor (not shown) is fitted together with the magnet 10672 described below. By connecting (fitting) the shaft of the drive motor to the through hole 10671b3, the path switching member 10670 can be rotated by the driving force of the drive motor.

The upper base member 10671a is formed with an outer diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the lower base member 10671b, and is positioned to cover the upper part of the lower base member 10671b, thereby preventing the magnet 10672 housed in the recess 10671b2 from falling out.

In addition, a through hole 10671a1 is formed through the axis of the upper base member 10671a. The shaft of the drive motor is fitted into the through hole 10671a1 and the through hole 10671b3, thereby stabilizing the rotation of the path switching member 10670.

The magnet 10672 is accommodated in the recess 10671b2 formed inside the groove 10671b1, and can exert a magnetic force on the outer peripheral surface of the groove 10671b1. This allows the game ball to be attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670 (groove 10671b1).

Next, referring to FIG. 124, the path in which the path switching member 10670 is arranged will be described. FIG. 124(a) is a top view of the path switching member 10670 and each of the paths 10641, 10642, and 10645. FIG. 124(b) is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and each of the paths 10641, 10642, and 10645 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXXIVb in FIG. 124(a). FIG. 124(c) is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and each of the paths 10641, 10642, and 10645 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124(a). FIG. 124(d) is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and each of the paths 10641, 10642, and 10645 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a).

In addition, in Fig. 124(a) to Fig. 124(d), each path 10641, 10642, and 10645 is illustrated diagrammatically. In Fig. 124(d), the second path 10642 and the third path 10645 are illustrated by dashed lines.

As shown in Fig. 124(a) to Fig. 124(d), the first path 10641 is curved and formed along the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670. The first path 10641 is formed with its bottom surface located approximately the radius of the game ball below the vertical center position of the groove portion 10671b1 (vertical direction in Fig. 123(b)). The bottom surface of the first path 10641 is formed with an incline toward the path switching member 10670 side, and wall portions are formed on both ends of the rolling direction so that they stand upward in the direction of gravity. This allows the game ball sent to the first path 10641 to roll toward the path switching member 10670 side.

In addition, the wall portion erected on the first path 10641 is not formed at a position along the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670. This allows the game ball rolling on the first path 10641 to be attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 10641a1 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670.

The upstream side of the first path 10641 is connected to the rear side of the second through holes 631b, 633b formed through the base plate 630 of the winning port unit 600. Therefore, the game ball sent inside the second through holes 631b, 633b can be guided to the path switching member 10670 by rolling along the first path 10641.

The second path 10642 is formed along the outer circumferential surface of the path switching member 10670, with the start end side of the second path 10642 being disposed at a predetermined distance from the end end side of the first path 10641 in the circumferential direction of the path switching member 10670. The second path 10642 and the first path 10641 are formed at the same position in the axial direction of the path switching member 10670.

The second path 10642 may be formed at a higher position than the first path 10641. In this case, as described below, when a trailing game ball is attracted to a leading game ball and hangs down from the leading game ball, the weight of the trailing game ball is less likely to act on the attraction surface.

The third path 10645 is formed below the second path 10642 in the direction of gravity (below in FIG. 124(d)). The start end side of the third path 10645 is formed by extending further in the circumferential direction of the path switching member 10670 than the second path 10642. In other words, the start end side of the third path 10645 is closer to the end end side of the first path 10641 than the start end side of the second path 10642.

The downstream side (terminal side) of the second path 10642 is connected to the rear side of the connecting hole 632b, and the downstream side (terminal side) of the third path is connected to the second connecting hole 8632e. In other words, a game ball sent to the third path 10645 has a higher chance of entering the through hole 632a than the second path 10642.

As described above, the path switching member 10670 is connected to the drive motor and is rotated by the drive motor. The path switching member 10670 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above (as viewed in the direction of FIG. 124(a)).

Next, referring to Fig. 125 and Fig. 126, a case where one game ball is sent to the first path 10641 will be described. Fig. 125(a) is a top view of the path switching member 10670 and each of the paths 10641, 10642, 10645, and Fig. 125(b) is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and each of the paths 10641, 10642, 10645. Fig. 126(a) is a top view of the path switching member 10670 and each of the paths 10641, 10642, 10645, and Fig. 126(b) is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and each of the paths 10641, 10642, 10645.

Note that Figure 125(b) corresponds to Figure 124(b), and Figure 126(b) corresponds to Figure 124(d).

As shown in Figures 125 and 126, when a game ball is sent to the first path 10641, the game ball rolls along the first path 10641 and the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670. In this case, as described above, the path switching member 10670 has a groove portion 10671b1 formed on its outer peripheral surface, and is formed so that the game ball can be attracted to the outer peripheral surface by the magnet 10672 disposed inside, so that the game ball rolling on the first path 10641 can be attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 10671b1.

As described above, the path switching member 10670 is rotated by the drive motor, so that the game ball can be sent to the second path 10642 by rotating the path switching member 10670 while the game ball is adsorbed in the groove portion 10671b1.

In addition, the game ball that is attracted to the groove portion 10671b1 and transported to the second path 10642 falls out of the groove portion 10671b1 by abutting against the vertical wall formed on the side of the second path 10642.

As described above, when one game ball is rolled along the first path 10641, the game ball can be sent to the second path 10642.

If the game ball rolling along the first path 10641 is not attracted to the groove portion 10671b1, the game ball is sent to the gap formed between the end of the first path 10641 and the beginning of the second path 10642, and is sent to a specified collection path.

Next, referring to Fig. 127 to Fig. 130, we will explain the case where two game balls are sent (dropped) consecutively on the first path 10641. Fig. 127(a), Fig. 128(a), Fig. 129(a) and Fig. 130(a) are top views of the path switching member 10670 and each of the paths 10641, 10642 and 10645, and Fig. 127(b), Fig. 128(b), Fig. 129(b) and Fig. 130(b) are side views of the path switching member 10670 and each of the paths 10641, 10642 and 10645.

Note that Fig. 127(b) corresponds to Fig. 124(b), Fig. 128(b) corresponds to Fig. 124(c), Fig. 129(b) corresponds to Fig. 124(c), and Fig. 130(b) corresponds to Fig. 124(c). Figs. 127 to 130 sequentially illustrate the transition states in which two game balls are sent.

First, as shown in Figures 127(a) and 127(b), when two game balls are sent consecutively to the first path 10641, the leading game ball is attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 10671b1 of the path switching member 10670. As a result, the attracted game ball (leading game ball) becomes magnetic, and the trailing game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of this leading game ball.

As shown in Figures 128(a) and 128(b), when the path switching member 10670 rotates with the leading game ball adsorbed inside the groove portion 10671b1 and the leading game ball is positioned in the gap between the first path 10641 and the second path 10642, the trailing game ball is suspended (hanging) below the leading game ball.

As shown in Figures 129(a) and 130(b), when the path switching member 10670 is further rotated while the trailing game ball is suspended below the leading game ball, the tip 10642a formed on the first path 10641 side of the plate forming the bottom surface of the second path 10642 is inserted between the leading game ball and the trailing game ball.

The tip 10642a is formed in a tapered flat plate shape and is disposed in a substantially horizontal position at a height where the tip is inserted into the suction position between the game ball (leading game ball) that is adsorbed to the underside of the path switching member 10670 and the game ball (trailing game ball) that is adsorbed to the preceding game ball and hung below. Therefore, when a leading game ball is adsorbed to the underside of the path switching member 10670 and a trailing game ball is adsorbed to the leading game ball, the adsorption between these game balls can be smoothly released, making it easier to drop only the trailing game ball (the game ball hanging below).

As a result, as shown in Figures 130(a) and 130(b), the trailing game ball falls off from the outer circumferential surface of the leading game ball. Therefore, the leading game ball can be sent to the first path 10641, and the trailing game ball can be sent to the second path 10642. In other words, when game balls are sent consecutively to the first path 10641, one ball can be sent to an advantageous path. As a result, it is possible to provide interest to the player.

In this way, the guide means for guiding the game ball comprises a rotatable path switching member 10670, a magnet 10672 disposed on the path switching member 10670 and attracting the game ball to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 in a hanging state, and a magnet 10672 that is positioned on the trajectory of the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 as the path switching member 10670 rotates, thereby coming into contact with the game ball and preventing it from falling off the path switching member 10670. The tip 10642a is located lower in the direction of gravity than the first (preceding) game ball that is attracted to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670, and the game ball that falls off the path switching member 10670 due to the contact of the tip 10642a is more likely to enter the through hole 632a than the game ball that is attracted to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 and sent, which increases the interest of the game.

In other words, it is easier for a game ball to enter the through hole 632a when one (or more) game balls are also adsorbed to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 than when only one game ball is adsorbed to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 (the ease of ball entry into the through hole 632a can be changed depending on the number of game balls passing through the passage member), so the player can also focus on the number of game balls that have not entered the left and right starting winning holes 26, 27. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the tenth embodiment, even when multiple game balls are rolling toward the path switching member 10670, if the game balls are connected, the preceding game ball is attracted to the path switching member 10670 and the following game ball is easily attracted to the preceding game ball, making it easier for at least the following game ball to enter the through hole 632a. On the other hand, if the game balls are spaced apart by a predetermined distance, the preceding game ball can be attracted to the path switching member 10670, but the following game ball cannot be attracted to the preceding game ball, and the following game ball is also attracted to the path switching member 10670 (a magnet 10672 different from the preceding game ball). In other words, it is difficult for both the preceding and following game balls to enter the through hole 632a. Therefore, the player can pay attention not only to the number of game balls but also to how they are connected. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the tenth embodiment, the game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 in a hanging state, and is sent in this hanging state as the path switching member 10670 rotates. Therefore, due to variations in the rolling speed and direction until attraction, and the attraction position, the game ball can be in an unstable state of swinging and falling off the path switching member 10670. In other words, even if only one game ball is attracted to the path switching member 10670 (when it is not abutting the tip portion 10642a), the game ball can be dropped, making it easier to enter the through-hole 632a.

Furthermore, when only one game ball is adsorbed to the path switching member 10670, the tip portion 10642a is prevented from acting on the game ball, making it easier to maintain the adsorption of the game ball. In other words, even if the game ball is unstable when adsorbed to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670, when the game ball is sent to the entrance of the second path 10642, it can enter the second path 10642 without being obstructed by the third path 10643.

This makes it possible to more clearly distinguish the difference in the ease of a ball entering the through-hole 632a between when only one game ball is attracted to and hanging (suspended) from the path switching member 10670 and when two or more game balls are attracted to the path switching member 10670 and hanging in a line. This allows the player to pay more attention to the number of game balls and how they are connected together. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, referring to Figures 131 to 137, the variable prize-winning device 11650 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the connecting hole 632b and the through hole 632c are formed apart from each other, but in the eleventh embodiment, the connecting hole 11632b and the through hole 11632c are formed connected to each other.

First, the configuration of the winning port unit 11600 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 131 to 133. Fig. 131 is a front view of the winning port unit 11600 in the eleventh embodiment. Fig. 132 is an exploded oblique front view of the winning port unit 11600. Fig. 133 is an exploded oblique rear view of the winning port unit 11600. Note that in Fig. 131, the decorative plate 610 is omitted, and the outline of the pathway member 11640 is shown by a dashed line.

As shown in Figures 131 to 133, the winning port unit 11600 in the eleventh embodiment is mainly formed with a decorative plate 610 having a plurality of winning ports 26, 27, 28, a base plate 11630 arranged opposite the decorative plate 610 and forming a flow path for game balls between the opposing plates, a path member 11640 forming a sending path for game balls between the base plate 11630, and a variable winning device 11650 arranged on the base plate 11630 and guiding the game balls flowing between the opposing plates 610 and 11630 to the through hole 632a.

The central recess 632 of the base plate 11630 is mainly formed with a through hole 632a formed in the approximate center of the base plate 630 in the left-right direction, two insertion holes 11632c formed on either side of the through hole 632a, and a connecting hole 11632b formed continuously above the insertion hole 11632c.

The insertion hole 11632c is an opening into which the variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 described later is inserted, and is formed as a horizontally elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and is formed with a downward slope toward the through hole 632a.

The connecting hole 11632b is an opening through which the game ball sent along the path member 11640 is discharged to the front side of the base plate 11630, as described below, and is formed continuously through from the upper part of the outer side (the side away from the through hole 632a) of the insertion hole 11632c.

The path member 11640 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a roughly box shape with the base plate 630 side open. The path member 11640 is a member for forming a path connecting the second through holes 631b, 633b and the connecting hole 11632b, and is formed of a first path 11641 formed on the left side when viewed from the front and connecting the second through hole 631b and the connecting hole 11632b on the left side when viewed from the front of the base plate 630, and a second path 11642 formed on the right side when viewed from the front and connecting the second through hole 633b and the connecting hole 11632b on the right side when viewed from the front of the base plate 11630.

In addition, a vertically cutout recess 11647 is formed on the bottom surface of the left-right center of the first path 11641 and the second path 11642. The variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 is disposed inside the recess 11647. This allows the game ball rolling on the first path 11641 and the second path 11642 to be sent to the top of the variable plate 11652 before passing through the connecting hole 11632b.

The variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 has multiple recesses 11652a extending in the left-right direction formed on the top surface of its tip end, arranged side by side in the front-rear direction. The recesses 11652a are formed in a straight line, and extend in different directions on the side farther from the through hole 632a and the side closer to the through hole 632a. The recesses 11652a on the side farther from the through hole 632a are formed parallel to the left-right direction. On the other hand, the recesses 11652a formed on the side closer to the through hole 632a are formed at an angle that approaches the front side as they approach the through hole 632a.

Next, the displacement of the variable winning device 11650 will be described with reference to Figure 134. Figures 134(a) and 134(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning port unit 11600 taken along line CXXXIV-CXXXIV in Figure 131. Note that Figure 134(a) shows the variable winning device 11650 before displacement, and Figure 134(b) shows it after displacement. Also, while the decorative panel 610 is omitted from Figure 131, the decorative panel 610 is shown in Figure 134.

As shown in Figures 134(a) and 134(b), the variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 before displacement is positioned so that the recess 11652a is adjacent to the end of the first path 11641. On the other hand, the variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 after displacement is positioned so that the recess 11652a protrudes toward the front side of the base plate 11630.

Next, referring to Figures 135(a) and 135(b), we will explain what happens when the variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 is extended forward with a game ball resting on the top of the variable plate 11652.

Figures 135(a) and 135(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning port unit 11600. Note that Figure 135(a) corresponds to Figure 134(a), and Figure 135(b) corresponds to Figure 134(b), respectively. In the following, only the rolling of the game ball on the left side in the left-right direction will be explained, and the explanation of the right side will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 135(a) and 135(b), when a game ball is thrown to the top of the variable plate 11652 which is retracted to the rear side, if the variable plate 11652 is displaced to a protruding position to the front side, the game ball can be displaced forward in accordance with the displacement of the variable plate 11652.

In this case, a recess 11652a is formed on the upper surface of the variable plate 11652, which increases the friction between the variable plate 11652 and the game ball, preventing the game ball from rotating and remaining in position when the variable plate 11652 is displaced. Therefore, the game ball can be displaced forward in response to the displacement of the variable plate 11652.

As described above, the game ball can be displaced to the front side (the front side of the base plate 11630) in accordance with the displacement of the variable plate 11652, making it easier to get the game ball to enter the through hole 632a than in the first embodiment.

In other words, since the variable plate 11652 forms a bottom surface (rolling surface) that is connected to the connecting hole 632b of the path member 11640, the game ball can be positioned on the variable plate 11652 even when the variable plate 11652 is not protruding (i.e., submerged), and therefore the time during which the game ball is positioned on the variable plate 11652 can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball that has passed through the path member 11640 to enter the through hole 632a, and the player can have stronger expectations of the ball entering the through hole 632a. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

The upper surface of the variable plate 11652, which forms the bottom surface of the path member 11640, is formed with a recess 11652a that guides the game ball located on the upper surface toward the through hole 632a. Therefore, when the variable plate 11652 is protruded from a state in which the game ball is located on the upper surface of the variable plate 11652 that has passed through the path member 11640 and is in a submerged state, the game ball can be protruded while being guided toward the through hole 632a by the action of the recess 11652a, making it easier for the game ball to enter the through hole 632a.

The recess 11652a may be, for example, a convex stripe or a concave groove (or a combination of these) that extends toward the protruding end of the variable plate 11652 in a direction approaching the through hole 632a and is provided convexly or concavely on the upper surface. The cross-sectional shape of the convex stripe or the concave groove is arbitrary, and examples of the cross-sectional shape include a rectangular cross-section, a polygonal cross-section, and an arc-shaped cross-section (or a cross-section of a shape that combines these).

Next, referring to Figures 136(a) to 136(c), we will explain what happens when the variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 is retracted to the rear side with a game ball resting on the top of the variable plate 11652.

Figures 136(a) to 136(c) are cross-sectional views of the winning port unit 11600. Note that Figure 136(a) corresponds to Figure 134(b), Figure 136(c) corresponds to Figure 134(a), and Figure 136(b) illustrates a position midway between Figures 136(a) and 136(c).

As shown in Figures 136(a) to 136(c), when a game ball is rolling on the inner part of the variable plate 11652, if the variable plate 11652 is displaced toward the rear side, the inclined surface of the recess 11652a formed on the inner part of the variable plate 11652 can displace the game ball toward the through hole 632a.

Therefore, as the variable plate 11652 is displaced, the game ball can be displaced toward the through hole 632a, making it easier for the game ball to enter the through hole 632a.

Next, referring to FIG. 137, we will explain the time during which the game ball can be affected by the variable plate 11652 when the variable plate 11652 is displaced.

Figure 137(a) is a time chart showing the change over time in the amount of displacement of the variable plate 11652, and Figure 137(b) is a time chart showing the change over time in the amount of displacement of the variable plate 652 in the first embodiment.

On the horizontal axis, "t0" indicates the time when the variable plates 11652 and 652 start to slide from a recessed state to a protruding (frontward) direction, and "t5" indicates the time when the sliding displacement in the recessed (retreating toward the rear) direction is completed and the recessed state is reached. On the vertical axis, "open position" indicates that the variable plates 11652 and 652 have been slid to the maximum protruding position.

In this embodiment, as described above, the variable plate 11652 forms part of the rolling surface of the path member 11640, so if a game ball is present (resting) on the variable plate 11652 when the variable plate 11652 begins to slide in the protruding direction, the game ball can be acted upon by the variable plate 11652 (making it easier for the ball to enter the through hole 632a). In other words, the action of the variable plate 11652 can be applied to the game ball from time t0 in FIG. 137(a). Note that time t4 is a time that has elapsed from time t0 shorter than time t3.

As described above, since the upper surface of the variable plate 11652 has multiple recesses 11652a formed thereon, even if the variable plate 11652 is slid in the immersion direction, if a game ball is present (resting) on the upper surface of the variable plate 11652, the game ball can be acted upon by the variable plate 11652 (recesses 11652a) (making it easier for the ball to enter the through hole 632a). In other words, the action of the variable plate 11652 can be exerted on the game ball until time t3 in FIG. 137(a).

On the other hand, in the variable plate 652 in the first embodiment, when the variable plate 652 is in a recessed (retracted) state, the game ball cannot be acted upon by the variable plate 652 (making it easier for the ball to enter the through hole 632a), and can be acted upon by the variable plate 652 only after the protruding amount of the variable plate 652 reaches a predetermined amount (the protruding amount at which the game ball can be placed on the upper surface). In other words, the game ball cannot be acted upon by the variable plate 652 until after time t2 in FIG. 137(b).

In addition, when the upper surface is formed as a closed sliding surface, as in the variable plate 652 in the first embodiment, when the variable plate 11652 is slid and displaced in the immersion direction, even if a game ball is present (resting) on the upper surface of the variable plate 652, the game ball cannot be acted upon (made to easily enter the through hole 632a) by the variable plate 652 (upper surface). In this case, the game ball is made to easily enter the through hole 632a by rolling on the upper surface of the variable plate 652. In other words, since it is necessary to secure time for this rolling, the game ball can only be acted upon by the variable plate 652 until time t4 in FIG. 137(b).

In this way, according to this embodiment, the time during which the game ball can be affected by the variable plate 11652 can be made longer than in the first embodiment (t4-t2<t3-t0). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the through hole 632a.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is in no way limited to the above embodiment, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be constructed by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of one or more other embodiments.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the radially inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotor 372R is formed in a plane perpendicular to the radial direction has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the radially inner surface of the groove portion may be formed inclined with respect to a direction perpendicular to the radial direction.

In the above first and third embodiments, when viewed in the radial direction of the rotating body 372R, 3372R, the outer diameter of the magnet 372Rb is smaller than the groove portion 372Rc2, 3372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc, 3372Rc. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the outer diameter of the magnet 372Rb may be larger than the groove portion 372Rc2, 3372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc, 3372Rc. In this case, the range in which the game ball is attracted to the groove portion 372Rc2 can be increased, so that the game ball can be more easily attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 372R, 3372R.

In the above first to fourth embodiments, the magnets 372Rb, 2372Rb are disposed inside the rotors 372R, 2372R, 3372R, 4372R, but this is not necessarily limited to the above, and the magnets 372Rb, 2372Rb may be disposed at positions that substantially coincide with the outer peripheral surfaces of the rotors 372R, 2372R, 3372R, 4372R. In other words, the magnets 372Rb, 2372Rb may be disposed in an exposed state.

The outer peripheral surface of the magnet 372Rb, 2372Rb is preferably arranged so as to substantially coincide with the recessed tip surface of the groove portion 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372Rc of the second rotating body 372Rc, 2372Rc, 3372Rc, 4372Rc. In this case, the rotation of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R, 4372R allows the game ball sent to the sixth ball sending path KR6 to be directly attracted to the magnet 372Rb, 2372Rb and sent to the seventh ball sending path KR7. Therefore, the attraction surface of the magnet 372Rb, 2372Rb can be visually recognized by the store staff or the player, so that if the magnet is damaged, the store staff or the player can immediately recognize it and can immediately respond to the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10.

In the above first to third embodiments, the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R are described as being attracted to the game ball flowing down the sixth ball sending path KR6 when the grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372c are disposed in positions adjacent to the sixth ball sending path KR6, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the stopper portion 396 may be displaced to stop the game ball flowing down the sixth ball sending path, and the stopped game ball may be attracted by rotating the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R. In this case, the displacement of the stopper portion 396 can form a case in which the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R and the game ball are attracted to each other, so that the player can see not only the rotation of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R but also the displacement of the stopper portion 396. This allows players to see multiple different ways the ball can be thrown, which adds to the player's interest.

In the first embodiment, a case was described in which the winning port unit 600 is provided with a variable winning device 650 in which the variable plate 652 slides back and forth, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the variable plate 652 may rotate around one end as an axis. In this case, the player can easily see the displacement of the variable plate 652, making it easier for the player to play, such as shooting a game ball into the game area in accordance with the movement of the variable plate 652. This can provide an interesting experience for the player.

In the first embodiment, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is disposed below the path member 640 in the direction of gravity, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 may be formed to be part of the lower end surface of the path member 640.

That is, a part of the first path 641 and the second path 642 of the path member 640 may be formed to be the upper surface of the variable plate 652. In this case, when the variable plate 652 is slid with a game ball on its upper surface, the game ball can be displaced forward in accordance with the sliding displacement. Therefore, the game ball can be brought closer to the through hole 632a in accordance with the sliding displacement, so that the probability of the game ball entering (entering) the through hole 632a can be increased. Note that, in order to prevent the game ball on the upper surface from slipping when the variable plate 652 is slid, it is preferable to make the upper end surface of the variable plate 652 uneven to increase frictional resistance.

In the ninth embodiment, the variable plate 9644a is inclined downward in a direction away from the second connecting hole 8632, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the variable plate 96644a may be inclined downward in a direction approaching the second connecting hole 8632.

In this case, the game ball sent to the third path 9645 and the fourth path 9646 can be sent smoothly to the second connecting hole 8632. In other words, the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the variable plate 9644a can be set to the direction toward the second connecting hole 8632e.

The tilt direction of the variable plate 9644a may be configured to be downwardly inclined toward the rear side of the prize winning port unit 9600, or downwardly inclined toward the front side of the prize winning port unit 9600.

In the above fifth embodiment, when the release member 5372Rd arranged on the rotating body 5372R is displaced, a part of the release member 5372Rd is displaced radially outward from the rotating body 5372R to release the adhesion between the preceding game ball and the rotating body 5372R, but this is not necessarily limited to the above.

The following description will be given with reference to Figure 138. Figure 138(a) is a side view of the rotating body 13572R, Figure 138(b) is a top view of the rotating body 13572R, Figure 138(c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 13572R taken along line CXXXVIIIc-CXXXVIIIc in Figure 138(b), and Figure 138(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 13572R taken along line CXXXVIIId-CXXXVIIId in Figure 138(b).

As shown in FIG. 138, the release member 13572Rd is disposed on the rotor 13572R in a state in which it can rotate around one end of the axis, and a magnet 372Rb is disposed on the release member 13572Rd.

The release member 13572Rd is formed by extending into the inner periphery of the groove portion 372Rc2 recessed into the outer periphery of the rotating body 13572R, and includes a pressing portion 5372Rd2, a part of which protrudes radially outward beyond the outer periphery of the rotating body 13572R.

The magnet 372b is located radially inside the groove 372Rc2 and is attached to a portion of the release member 13572Rd that extends to the inner periphery of the groove 372Rc2.

Therefore, when the pressing portion 5372Rd2 is pressed by a trailing game ball, the magnet 372Rd can be displaced radially inward of the rotating body 13572R. As a result, the magnetic force of the magnet 372Rb acting on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 13572R is weakened, so that the preceding game ball attracted to the rotating body 13572 can be dropped off.

In the first embodiment, the recess depth of the groove portion 372Rc2 is such that the game ball abuts against the bottom surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 when the game ball is fitted in the groove portion 372Rc2, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the recess depth of the groove portion 372Rc2 may be set to a dimension such that the game ball does not abut against the bottom surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 when the game ball is fitted in the groove portion 372Rc2. In this case, the inner edge of the groove portion 372Rc2 (the ridge between the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 and the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 372R) can be abutted against the game ball. Therefore, when the game ball is sent in accordance with the rotation of the rotating body 372R, it is possible to suppress the game ball from wobbling in the rotation direction of the rotating body 372R, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the release of the adsorption of the game ball.

In particular, when the game ball is sent in conjunction with the rotation of the rotor 372R, the direction of the vertical component of gravity acting on the game ball reverses before and after the game ball (groove portion 372Rc2) passes through the uppermost position in the direction of gravity, and the reaction to this reversal tends to cause the game ball to wobble in the direction of rotation of the rotor 372R. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the inner edge of groove portion 372Rc2 (the ridge between the inner surface of groove portion 372Rc2 and the outer circumferential surface of rotor 372R) can be brought into contact with the game ball. In other words, the game ball can be sandwiched by the inner edge of groove portion 372Rc2 from both sides in the direction of rotation of rotor 372R, so that the game ball can be prevented from wobbling in the direction of rotation of rotor 372R, and as a result, the adsorption of the game ball can be prevented from being released.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which multiple LEDs 355a are arranged on the rear side of each of the first and second irregular reflection sections 353d and 354b, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, one LED 355a may be arranged at a position straddling the first and second irregular reflection sections 353d and 354b. In this case, the number of LEDs 355a can be reduced, which helps prevent manufacturing costs from increasing.

In the above tenth embodiment, a case where two game balls are adsorbed (hanging) on the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, three game balls may be adsorbed (hanging) on the outer surface of the path switching member 10670.

In this case, by positioning the tip 10642a of the second path 10642 vertically at a position equivalent to the diameter of the game balls below the first path 10641, the two leading game balls can be sent to the second path 10642 and the one trailing game ball can be sent to the third path. Also, by making the vertical position of the tip 10642a of the second path 10642 approximately the same as that of the first path 10641, the one leading game ball can be sent to the second path 10642 and the two trailing game balls can be sent to the third path 10643. That is, when multiple game balls are attracted (hanging) to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670, the number of balls sent to the second path 10642 can be set arbitrarily, which increases the degree of freedom in design.

In the above tenth embodiment, when two game balls are attracted (hanging) to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670, the tip portion 10642a is inserted between the game balls to separate them, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, an abutment member that abuts against the outer surface of the trailing game ball that hangs down may be abutted against the leading game ball, causing the trailing game ball to fall together with the leading game ball.

As a shape for dropping the trailing game ball together with the leading game ball, it is preferable to connect the lower end side of the groove portion 10671b1 formed in the path switching member 10670 to the lower surface side of the lower base member 10671b (path switching member 10670) to eliminate the step between the lower surface of the groove portion 10671b1 and the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670. By connecting the lower end side of the groove portion 10671b1 formed in the path switching member 10670 to the lower surface side of the lower base member 10671b (path switching member 10670), when the trailing game ball is attracted (hangs down) to the leading game ball attracted to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670, the leading game ball will not come into contact with the lower end surface of the groove portion 10671b1, so that the leading game ball can be easily displaced downward. This allows the trailing game ball to fall from the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 together with the leading game ball.

The groove portion 10671b1 may also be formed on the same peripheral surface as the outer peripheral surface of the lower base member 10671b (pathway switching member 10670). In this case, when a trailing game ball is attracted (hangs down) to a leading game ball attracted to the outer surface of the pathway switching member 10670, the leading game ball will not come into contact with the lower end surface of the groove portion 10671b1, making it easier to displace the leading game ball downward. Therefore, the trailing game ball can be dropped from the outer surface of the pathway switching member 10670 together with the leading game ball.

Furthermore, the inner surface of the groove portion 10671b1 (the surface to which the leading game ball is attracted) may be inclined radially inward toward the downward direction of gravity. By inclining the inner surface of the groove portion 10671b1 (the surface to which the leading game ball is attracted) radially inward toward the downward direction of gravity, when a trailing game ball is attracted (hangs down) to the leading game ball that is attracted to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670, the leading game ball can be easily displaced downward. Therefore, the trailing game ball can be dropped from the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 together with the leading game ball.

In the above tenth embodiment, a case where two game balls are attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when three game balls are attracted, the load may be set so that the preceding game ball is released from the attraction between the path switching member 10670. Alternatively, the first preceding game ball may be sent to the second path 10642, the second game ball to the third path 10643, and the third game ball to the recovery port.

In the above first to third embodiments, the second rolling portion 381c extending along the outer surface of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R is formed above the axis of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the second rolling portion 381c may be formed below the axis of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R. In this case, when a leading game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R and a trailing game ball is attracted to the leading game ball, it is easy to release the attraction between the leading game ball and the outer surface of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R.

In the above first to third embodiments, the grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372Rc2 formed in the rotors 372R, 2372R, 3372R are recessed, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372Rc2 may be formed on the same circumferential surface as the outer circumferential surface of the rotors 372R, 2372R, 3372R.

In this case, when a leading game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R, and a trailing game ball is attracted to the leading game ball, it becomes easier to release the attraction between the leading game ball and the outer surface of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R.

The grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372Rc2 may be formed to protrude from the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R. In this case, when a leading game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R and a following game ball is attracted to the leading game ball, the leading game ball can be easily moved from the grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372Rc2. The attraction between the leading game ball and the outer surface of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R can be easily released.

In the seventh embodiment, the through-hole 7613e is formed penetrating from the back surface of the central cover member 7613 to the front surface, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and it may be recessed in the back surface of the central cover member 7613. Also, instead of being recessed, it may be a portion that protrudes from the back surface side of the central cover member 7613 that holds the game ball.

In this case, when the trailing game ball collides with the leading game ball, the trailing game ball rebounds toward the through hole 632a, so it is preferable to set the distance between the opposing central cover member 7613 and the base plate 630 to be approximately the same as the diameter of the two game balls.

In the seventh embodiment, the width of the connecting hole 632b is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the width of the connecting hole 632b may be set to a dimension that is sufficiently larger than the diameter of the game ball (for example, the diameter dimension of two game balls).

In this case, it is preferable that the inner edge of the through hole 7613e on the side separated from the through hole 632a is formed at a position offset in the left-right direction of the base plate 630 between the side of the connecting hole 632b on the side separated from the through hole 632a and the radius of the game ball. This makes it easier to bounce the trailing game ball toward the through hole 632a when the trailing game ball collides with the leading game ball sent to the inner edge of the through hole 7613e.

In the seventh embodiment, the width between the opposing left and right connecting holes 632b is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball (for example, 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball). In this case, game balls can be easily discharged from the connecting hole 632b, and therefore, clogging of the connecting hole 632b with game balls can be prevented.

In this case, it is preferable that the inner edge of the through hole 7613e adjacent to the through hole 632a is formed at a position offset in the left-right direction of the base plate 630 between the side of the connecting hole 632b adjacent to the through hole 632a and the radius of the game ball. This makes it easier to bounce the trailing game ball toward the through hole 632a when the trailing game ball collides with the leading game ball sent to the inner edge of the through hole 7613e.

In the seventh embodiment, the through hole 7613e is formed in a substantially circular shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the through hole 7613e may be formed as a long hole that is long in the left-right direction of the base plate 630, and the width dimension in the short direction may be larger toward the outside in the left-right direction. In this case, the inner edge shape of the through hole 7613e makes it easier for the game ball sent from the connecting hole 632b to be displaced in the left-right direction. This allows freedom in the arrangement of the through holes 7613e, thereby improving the freedom of design.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the number of game balls placed on the upper part of the variable plates 8644ba, 9644a was set to two, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the length of the variable plates 8644ba, 9644a may be increased to switch the operation of the variable plates 8644ba, 9644a between when two game balls are placed on the upper part and when three game balls are placed on the upper part. In other words, the operation of the variable plates 8644ba, 9644a can be set arbitrarily, improving the degree of freedom in design.

In the second embodiment, the magnet 2372Rb is formed to be curved in a spiral shape in the axial direction of the rotor 2372R, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnet may be formed in a straight line.

In this case, it is preferable to arrange the magnet 2372Rb so that it is inclined in the direction of rotation of the rotor 2372R as it approaches the upstream side of the second rolling portion 381c. As a result, it is possible to easily attract the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c to the outer circumferential surface of the rotor 2372R.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine that is different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, the operation lever is operated to change the symbols, and the stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information and then displays the determined identification information, in which the variable display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the variable display of the identification information is stopped and finalized due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern as a fixed one, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Concept of the invention using the movable ball entry device 300 as an example>
A gaming machine A1 is provided with a displacement member that is displaceably arranged to a position visible to a player and that switches the flow path of gaming balls depending on the displaced position, the gaming machine comprising: a base member on which one or more light-emitting means formed to be able to emit light are mounted with their light-emitting surfaces facing the front side; and a first transparent member and a second transparent member that are arranged on the front side of the base member and made of a light-transmitting material, the displacement member being made of a light-transmitting material and arranged on the front side of the second transparent member, the distance between the second transparent member and the base member being set to a distance different from the distance between the first transparent member and the base member.

Here, a gaming machine is known that is equipped with a displacement member that is displaceably arranged in a position visible to the player and switches the flow path of the gaming ball depending on the displacement position (JP Patent Publication 8-131612). In this case, a technology is also known in which the displacement member is arranged on the front side of a transparent member made of a light-transmitting material, and light is irradiated from the back of the transparent member, allowing the player to see the displacement member along with the light that has passed through the transparent member, and drawing attention to the displacement member. However, in the conventional technology described above, since the displacement member is made of a non-transmitting material that does not transmit light, the area (area) of light visible to the player is reduced by the size of the displacement member, hindering the presentation effect.

In response to this, the applicant of the present application developed a technology (not publicly known at the time of filing this application) that ensures an area (area) of light visible to the player by forming the displacement member from a light-transmitting material, making the light that passes through the displacement member visible to the player in addition to the light that passes through the transparent member. However, it was found that when the displacement member is formed from a light-transmitting material, there is a problem in that it is difficult for the player to identify the position of the displacement member.

In contrast, the gaming machine A1 includes a substrate member on which one or more light-emitting means formed to be capable of emitting light are mounted with their light-emitting surfaces facing the front side, and a first transparent member and a second transparent member formed of a light-transmitting material arranged on the front side of the substrate member, and a displacement member formed of a light-transmitting material and arranged on the front side of the second transparent member. The distance between the second transparent member and the substrate member is set to a distance different from the distance between the first transparent member and the substrate member, so that the area (area) of light to be viewed by the player is secured, and the position of the displacement member can be easily identified by the player. That is, since the distances from the light-emitting means to the first transparent member and the second transparent member are different, the diffusion mode of the light when passing through the first transparent member and the second transparent member can be made different. Therefore, the mode of light that passes through the first transparent member and is viewed by the player can be made different from the mode of light that passes through the second transparent member and is viewed by the player. As a result, the position of the displacement member arranged on the front side of the second transparent member can be easily identified by the player.

When multiple light emitting means are mounted on the substrate member, it is not necessary for the light emitting means to be mounted in both the first region facing the first transparent member and the second region facing the second transparent member among the regions of the substrate member, and it is sufficient that the light emitting means is mounted in at least one of the first or second regions. In addition, the light emitting means may be mounted in a position overlapping both the first region and the second region.

A gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the first transparent member and the second transparent member in the gaming machine A1 have projections and recesses formed on at least one of the front and back surfaces.

According to gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, the first transparent member and the second transparent member have unevenness formed on at least one of the front and back surfaces, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means and passing through the first transparent member and the second transparent member can be easily diffused by the unevenness. In this case, since the first transparent member and the second transparent member are at different distances from the light emitting means, the diffusion mode of the light passing through the first transparent member and the diffusion mode of the light passing through the second transparent member can be made different. Therefore, the difference between the mode of the light that passes through the first transparent member and is visible to the player and the mode of the light that passes through the second transparent member and is visible to the player can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to identify the position of the displacement member disposed on the front side of the second transparent member.

A gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the unevenness formed on the first transparent member and the unevenness formed on the second transparent member are substantially the same as those of the gaming machine A2.

According to gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of gaming machine A2, the unevenness formed on the first transparent member and the unevenness formed on the second transparent member are substantially the same, so that when no light is emitted from the light emitting means, the first transparent member and the second transparent member (the second transparent member visible through the displacement member) can be visually recognized by the player as having the same appearance. In other words, the first transparent member and the second transparent member have different appearances (light patterns) after the light emitting means emits light, but by having the same appearance before the light emitting means emits light, it is possible to highlight the effect in which the appearances (light patterns) of the first transparent member and the second transparent member are different (dissimilar).

Even if the first transparent member and the second transparent member have the same unevenness, the first transparent member and the second transparent member are at different distances from the light emitting means, so the manner in which the light is diffused when passing through the first transparent member and the second transparent member can be made different. In other words, the manner in which the light that passes through the first transparent member and is visible to the player can be made different from the manner in which the light that passes through the second transparent member and is visible to the player.

A gaming machine A4 is any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, and is characterized by having a connecting member that connects the first transparent member and the second transparent member.

Gaming machine A4 has the same effects as any of gaming machines A1 to A3, and further includes a connecting member that connects the first transparent member and the second transparent member. This prevents light that has passed through one of the first or second transparent member (the one with the smaller distance to the light-emitting means) from penetrating between the other of the first or second transparent member (the one with the larger distance to the light-emitting means) and the light-emitting means. As a result, the first and second transparent members can be easily made to have different aspects of light (particularly light and dark) that are transmitted through them and visible to the player. As a result, it is easy for the player to identify the position of the displacement member disposed on the front side of the second transparent member.

A gaming machine A5 is characterized in that in the gaming machine A4, the first transparent member and the second transparent member have unevenness formed on at least one of the front and back surfaces, and the front and back surfaces of the connecting member are not uneven.

Gaming machine A5 has the same effect as gaming machine A4, but the first and second transparent members have unevenness on at least one of the front and back surfaces, and the front and back surfaces of the connecting member are not uneven, allowing the player to see the first and second transparent members (the second transparent member visible through the displacement member) and the connecting member as having different appearances. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the boundary between the first and second transparent members using the connecting member, and as a result makes it easier for the player to identify the position of the displacement member disposed on the front side of the second transparent member.

A gaming machine A6 is any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, characterized in that the distance between one of the first transparent member or the second transparent member and the light emitting means is greater than the distance between the other of the first transparent member or the second transparent member and the light emitting means, and the one is located higher in the direction of gravity than the other.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A1 to A5, gaming machine A6 has the advantage that the distance between one of the first or second transparent member and the light emitting means is greater than the distance between the other of the first or second transparent member and the light emitting means, and one of the first or second transparent member is positioned higher in the direction of gravity than the other, thereby preventing damage to the light emitting means.

In other words, on the side where the distance to the light-emitting means is small (narrow) compared to the side where the distance to the light-emitting means is large (wide), the space is narrower, and the temperature in the space increases due to the heat generated by the light-emitting means, increasing the risk of damage to the light-emitting means. In contrast, according to gaming machine A6, the air whose temperature has been increased in the space on the side where the distance to the light-emitting means is small (narrow) can be allowed to rise and escape to the space located above in the direction of gravity (i.e. the space on the side where the distance to the light-emitting means is large (wide). As a result, damage to the light-emitting means on the side where the distance is small (narrow) can be suppressed.

A gaming machine A7 is characterized in that in the gaming machine A6, the distance between the first transparent member and the light emitting means is made larger than the distance between the second transparent member and the light emitting means, and the space between the opposing displacement member and the second transparent member is the first flow path for gaming balls.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A6, gaming machine A7 has the advantage that the distance between the first transparent member and the light emitting means is greater than the distance between the second transparent member and the light emitting means, and the space between the displacement member and the second transparent member is the first flow path for the game ball, making it possible to miniaturize the unit consisting of the displacement member, the first transparent member, and the second transparent member. In other words, by making the space between the displacement member and the second transparent member, which is formed to change the form of light visible to the player, the first flow path for the game ball, dead space can be effectively utilized, and there is no need to secure separate space for the flow path. This makes it possible to miniaturize the unit accordingly.

A gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the displacement member, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, is formed as a plate-like body whose base end is rotatably supported on a shaft, and a plate thickness portion with a larger plate thickness is formed on the tip end side.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A1 to A7, the displacement member is formed as a plate-like body with the base end side rotatably supported on a shaft, and a thick plate portion with a larger plate thickness is formed on the tip end side. Therefore, among the light that passes through the displacement member and is visible to the player, the light that passes through the thick plate portion and is visible to the player can be made different from the light that passes through the other parts excluding the thick plate portion and is visible to the player. Also, as the displacement member rotates around the base end side, the position of the light that passes through the tip side (thick plate portion) and is visible can be displaced. In other words, by utilizing the displacement of the position of the light that passes through the tip side (thick plate portion) of the displacement member, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the displacement (rotation) operation of the displacement member.

A gaming machine A9 is characterized in that at least one of the front and back surfaces of the thick plate portion in the gaming machine A8 is curved to have an arc-shaped cross section.

According to gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A8, at least one of the front and back surfaces of the thick plate portion is curved into an arc-shaped cross section, so that the thick plate portion can function as a lens (i.e., refracting light incident on the thick plate portion to diverge or converge). This makes it possible to more clearly distinguish between the light that passes through the displacement member and is visible to the player, which passes through the thick plate portion, and the light that passes through the other parts excluding the thick plate portion and is visible to the player. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the displacement (rotation) action of the displacement member.

A gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be positioned in a position that is approximately flush with the first transparent member in the gaming machine A8 or A9.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A8 and A9, gaming machine A10 is formed so that the displacement member can be positioned so that it is approximately flush with the first transparent member, so that the displacement member and the first transparent member can be viewed as one unit, and the area (area) of the light emitted from the light-emitting means and viewed by the player can be viewed as a larger area.

A gaming machine A10 is provided with a rolling member that is inclined downward toward the front of the displacement member to roll the gaming ball, and the height position of the downstream end of the rolling member is lower by the radius of the gaming ball than the height position of the plate thickness part of the displacement member that is positioned at a position that is approximately flush with the first transparent member.

Gaming machine A11 has the same effects as gaming machine A10, but is also equipped with a rolling member that is inclined downward toward the front of the displacement member to roll the gaming ball, and the height position of the rolling member at its downstream end is lower by the radius of the gaming ball than the height position of the thick part of the displacement member that is positioned at a position that is approximately flush with the first transparent member. This allows the gaming ball that rolls on the rolling part and is sent from the downstream end toward the front of the displacement member to collide with the thick part of the displacement member, whose strength is relatively high due to its increased thickness. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the displacement member.

<Concept of the invention using the variable unit 360 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising a roughly cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with its rotation axis facing horizontally, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts game balls to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and which sends the attracted game balls in the direction of rotation of the rotating member by rotating the rotating member with the game balls attracted to the outer peripheral surface, characterized in that the gaming machine B1 comprises a rolling surface that is juxtaposed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and on which the game balls roll, and which is positioned higher in the direction of gravity than the rotation axis of the rotating member.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a roughly cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with its axis of rotation facing horizontally, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts gaming balls to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and that sends the gaming balls in the direction of rotation of the rotating member by rotating the rotating member with the gaming balls attracted to the outer circumferential surface (for example, JP 2012-231890 A). When two gaming balls roll in succession toward the rotating member, the leading gaming ball may be attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and the following gaming ball may be attracted to the leading gaming ball. In this case, there is a problem in that when the rotating member rotates, the weight of the two balls acts, releasing the attraction between the rotating member and the leading gaming ball.

In contrast, gaming machine B1 is provided with a rolling surface that is juxtaposed to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member and on which the gaming balls roll, and the rolling surface is located above the rotation axis of the rotating member in the direction of gravity. Therefore, for example, when two gaming balls roll in a line toward the rotating member on the rolling surface, and the leading gaming ball is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member while a following gaming ball is attracted to the leading gaming ball, it is easy to place the leading gaming ball on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member. This makes it difficult for the attraction between the rotating member and the leading gaming ball to be released.

A gaming machine B2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1, a receiving surface is provided on the opposite side of the rotating member from the rolling surface, which is arranged in parallel with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and receives a gaming ball that is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the receiving surface is located above the rotation axis of the rotating member in the direction of gravity.

Here, the game ball that is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member and sent is received by a receiving surface that is arranged parallel to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member on the opposite side of the rotating member from the rolling surface. However, there is a problem in that the game ball tends to bounce on the receiving surface, making it difficult to send the game ball smoothly from the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member to the receiving surface.

In contrast, according to gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, the receiving surface is located above the rotation axis of the rotating member in the direction of gravity, so that the game ball is prevented from bouncing on the receiving surface, and the game ball can be sent smoothly from the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member to the receiving surface. That is, according to gaming machine B2, the game ball can be received by the receiving surface before the downward displacement component in the direction of gravity becomes large as the rotating member rotates (i.e., at a stage where the horizontal component is relatively large), so that the game ball can be prevented from bouncing on the receiving surface. Also, before the game ball is received by the receiving surface, the adsorption of the game ball is released, so that the game ball can be prevented from falling from the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member to the receiving surface. From this point of view, the game ball can be prevented from bouncing on the receiving surface.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the receiving surface of gaming machine B2 is formed with a downward inclination in a direction away from the rotating member.

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine B2, the receiving surface is formed with a downward incline in the direction away from the rotating member, so that the throwing direction of the gaming ball that is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member and thrown as the rotating member rotates can be made closer to the rolling direction of the gaming ball after it is received on the receiving surface. As a result, the gaming ball is prevented from bouncing on the receiving surface, and the gaming ball can be sent smoothly from the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member to the receiving surface.

Gaming machine B4 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B3, characterized in that the rotating member has a recess recessed into its outer circumferential surface, and the magnet is disposed in a position that attracts the gaming ball to the inner surface of the recess.

According to gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B3, the rotating member has a recess recessed into its outer circumferential surface, and the magnet is disposed in a position that allows the gaming ball to be attracted to the inner surface of the recess, so that the gaming ball can be supported by the inner surface of the recess (the step between the outer circumferential surface). As a result, for example, when two gaming balls are rolled in a line toward the rotating member on the rolling surface, and the leading gaming ball is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and the following gaming ball is attracted to the leading gaming ball, it is difficult for the attraction between the rotating member and the leading gaming ball to be released.

Gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the recess depth of the recess in gaming machine B4 is set to a dimension such that when a gaming ball is inserted in the recess, the gaming ball does not abut against the bottom surface of the recess.

According to gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine B4, the recess depth of the recess is set to a dimension such that when a gaming ball is inserted in the recess, the gaming ball does not abut the bottom surface of the recess, so that the inner edge of the recess (the ridge between the inner surface of the recess and the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member) can abut against the gaming ball. Therefore, when the gaming ball is sent in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from wobbling in the direction of rotation of the rotating member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the attraction of the gaming ball from being released.

In particular, when a game ball is sent as the rotating member rotates, the direction of the vertical component of gravity acting on the game ball reverses before and after the game ball (recess) passes the uppermost position in the direction of gravity, and the reaction to this reversal makes the game ball prone to wobble in the direction of rotation of the rotating member. In contrast, with gaming machine B5, the inner edge of the recess (the ridge between the inner surface of the recess and the outer periphery of the rotating member) can be brought into contact with the game ball, i.e., the game ball can be sandwiched between the inner edges of the recess from both sides in the direction of rotation of the rotating member, preventing the game ball from wobbling in the direction of rotation of the rotating member, and as a result, preventing the ball from being released from adhesion.

A gaming machine B4 is provided with a receiving surface that is arranged on the opposite side of the rolling surface to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and that receives the game ball that is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the depth of the recess is set to a dimension that allows the game ball to contact the bottom surface of the recess when the game ball is fitted in the recess, and the receiving surface side is set to a smaller dimension than the rolling surface side. A gaming machine B6.

According to gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine B4, the recess depth is set to a dimension that allows the gaming ball to contact the bottom surface of the recess when the gaming ball is stuck in the recess, and the receiving surface side is set to a smaller dimension than the rolling surface side, so that when the gaming ball sent with the rotation of the rotating member wobbles in the direction of rotation of the rotating member, the gaming ball can be easily rolled (dropped off) from the recess to the receiving surface side. In other words, the attraction of the gaming ball can be released and it can be prevented from returning to the rolling surface.

Gaming machine B7 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B6, characterized in that the rolling surface is formed as an inclined surface that rolls the gaming ball in a direction approximately parallel to the direction of the rotation axis of the rotating member.

According to gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B6, the rolling surface is formed as an inclined surface that rolls the gaming ball in a direction approximately parallel to the direction of the rotation axis of the rotating member, so that the rolling direction of the gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface and the throwing direction of the gaming ball sent with the rotation of the rotating member can be approximately perpendicular. As a result, it is possible to add variety to the movement of the gaming ball and ensure a high number of gaming balls that can be viewed at one time, improving the interest of the player.

Gaming machine B8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B7, it is provided with a blocking means for blocking the rolling of gaming balls on the rolling surface, and the magnet of the rotating member is disposed in a position where it can be attracted to the gaming ball whose rolling has been blocked by the blocking means.

Gaming machine B8 has the same effects as gaming machine B7, but is also provided with a blocking means for blocking the rolling of gaming balls on the rolling surface, and the magnet of the rotating member is disposed in a position where it can attract gaming balls whose rolling has been blocked by the blocking means. This allows for two different situations: a gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface is directly attracted to the rotating member, and a gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface is blocked by the blocking means and then attracted to the rotating member (i.e., a gaming ball that would have passed through without being attracted to the rotating member if not blocked by the blocking means is blocked by the blocking means and is now able to be attracted to the rotating member), which increases the player's interest.

<Concept of the invention using the variable unit 2360 as an example>
A gaming machine C1 comprises a roughly cylindrical rotating member that is rotatably formed with its rotation axis facing horizontally, and a magnet that is arranged on the rotating member and attracts a gaming ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the rotating member is rotated with the gaming ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface, thereby sending the attracted gaming ball in the direction of rotation of the rotating member. The gaming machine C1 comprises a rolling surface that is arranged juxtaposed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and rolls the gaming ball in a direction roughly parallel to the direction of the rotation axis of the rotating member, and the magnet is arranged at least at an attraction position where the gaming ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and an upstream position that is upstream of the rolling surface from the attraction position.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a roughly cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with its rotation axis facing horizontally, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts a gaming ball to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and that sends the gaming ball in the direction of rotation of the rotating member by rotating the rotating member with the gaming ball attracted to the outer circumferential surface (for example, JP 2012-231890 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the gaming ball rolls on the rolling surface while swinging, so there is a problem that even when the rotating member is rotated and the gaming ball rolls on the rolling surface at a timing that allows it to face the attracting position of the rotating member, the gaming ball is difficult to attract to the attracting position.

In contrast, according to gaming machine C1, magnets are disposed at least at an attraction position where the gaming ball is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and at an upstream position upstream of the attraction position on the rolling surface, so that the gaming ball can be attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member by the magnetic force of the magnet disposed at the upstream position, and the gaming ball can be prevented from rolling while swinging on the rolling surface. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated and the gaming ball rolls on the rolling surface at a timing when it can face the attraction position of the rotating member, the gaming ball can be easily attracted to the attraction position.

The magnet disposed at the attraction position and the magnet disposed at the upstream position may be formed separately (i.e., two magnets) or may be formed integrally (i.e., one magnet).

Gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the rotating member in gaming machine C1 has a recess on its outer circumferential surface that serves as the attraction position.

Here, it is necessary to have the game ball attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member at the attraction position, but not to have the game ball attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member at the upstream position. To achieve this by using the difference in magnetic force of the magnets (i.e., by placing a magnet with strong magnetic force at the attraction position and a magnet with weak magnetic force at the upstream position), it is necessary to prepare two types of magnets with different magnetic forces, which leads to increased product costs.

In contrast, according to gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, the rotating member has a recess that is recessed into its outer circumferential surface and serves as the attraction position. Therefore, by embedding one magnet in the rotating member, the recess can be used to set the distance from the magnet to the gaming ball at the attraction position (the distance from the magnet to the bottom surface of the recess) to a dimension smaller than the distance from the magnet to the gaming ball at the upstream position (the distance from the magnet to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member). In other words, it is possible to attract the gaming ball to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member at the attraction position, while not attracting the gaming ball to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member at the upstream position. Therefore, two types of magnets are not required, and there is no need to complicate the shape of the magnet, which allows for a reduction in product costs.

In addition, when a game ball is attracted to the attraction position, the game ball can be held by the recess. Therefore, when the game ball is sent in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member, the game ball can be prevented from wobbling in the direction of rotation of the rotating member, and as a result, the attraction of the game ball can be prevented from being released.

In this case, the recess depth is preferably set to a dimension that allows the gaming ball to come into contact with the bottom surface of the recess when the gaming ball is fitted in the recess. This is because the inner edge of the recess (the ridge between the inner surface of the recess and the outer periphery of the rotating member) can come into contact with the gaming ball, making it easier to prevent the gaming ball from wobbling. However, the recess depth may also be a dimension that allows the gaming ball to come into contact with the bottom surface of the recess when the gaming ball is fitted in the recess.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C1 or C2, at least a portion of the magnet that is disposed in the upstream position is disposed forward in the direction of rotation of the rotating member than the portion that is disposed in the attraction position.

According to gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines C1 or C2, at least a part of the magnet arranged in the upstream position is arranged further forward in the rotation direction of the rotating member than the part arranged in the attraction position, so that the magnetic force of the magnet in the upstream position can be easily applied to the gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface toward the attraction position. In other words, the gaming ball can be attracted toward the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and the gaming ball can be prevented from rolling while swinging on the rolling surface. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated and the gaming ball rolls on the rolling surface at a timing when it can face the attraction position of the rotating member, the gaming ball can be easily attracted to the attraction position.

Gaming machine C4 is characterized in that in gaming machine C2 or C3, the bottom surface of the recess is inclined upward toward the upstream position and smoothly connects to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and is formed so that the gaming ball can come into contact with the bottom surface of the recess at least on the upstream position side.

According to gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of gaming machines C2 and C3, the bottom surface of the recess is inclined upward toward the upstream position and smoothly connects to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and is formed so that the gaming ball can abut against the bottom surface of the recess at least on the upstream position side. Therefore, when the gaming ball is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member by the magnet at the upstream position and fits into the recess by the magnet at the attraction position, the gaming ball can be smoothly fitted into the recess. In other words, the gaming ball is prevented from bouncing, making it easier to attract the gaming ball to the attraction position (recess).

A gaming machine C5 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, a partition wall is provided that stands up from the rolling surface while facing the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and partitions the rolling area of the gaming ball, and the opposing distance between the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member and the partition wall is set to a smaller dimension toward the downstream side of the rolling surface.

Gaming machine C5 has the same effects as any of gaming machines C1 to C4, but also includes a partition wall that stands up from the rolling surface while facing the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member and partitions the rolling area of the gaming ball. The distance between the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member and the partition wall is set to a smaller dimension toward the downstream side of the rolling surface, so that the gaming ball can be prevented from rolling and swaying on the rolling surface not only by the action of the magnet at the upstream position (attraction by magnetic force) but also by the guidance of the partition wall. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated and the gaming ball rolls on the rolling surface at a timing when it can face the attraction position of the rotating member, the gaming ball can be easily attracted to the attraction position.

A gaming machine C6 is any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, and is provided with a receiving surface that is arranged alongside the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member on the opposite side of the rolling surface, sandwiching the rotating member, and that receives a gaming ball that is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member and sent, and the receiving surface is formed with a downward incline in the direction away from the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member.

Gaming machine C6 has the same effects as any of gaming machines C1 to C5, but also has a receiving surface that is arranged on the opposite side of the rolling surface to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member and receives a game ball that is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and the receiving surface is formed with a downward incline in the direction away from the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, so that when a game ball that is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member (attraction position) is received by the receiving surface, the downward incline of the receiving surface causes the game ball to roll, and the game ball can be quickly removed from the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member. In other words, the game ball is attracted to a magnet at an upstream position, or is subjected to the action of magnetic force, which can prevent the game ball from slowing down when rolling on the receiving surface.

Gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the length dimension of the receiving surface along the rotation axis direction in gaming machine C6 is set to a dimension greater than the length dimension along the rotation axis direction of the magnet disposed on the rotating member.

According to gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of gaming machine C6, the length dimension of the receiving surface along the rotation axis direction is set to be greater than the length dimension along the rotation axis direction of the magnet arranged on the rotating member, so that even if the gaming ball is attracted to a position other than the attraction position of the rotating member (i.e., attracted to a magnet at an upstream position) and is thrown as the rotating member rotates, the gaming ball can be received by the receiving surface.

<Concept of the invention using the winning port unit 600 as an example>
Gaming machine D1 has a first ball inlet and a second ball inlet located downstream of the first ball inlet in a gaming area, the gaming machine comprising: a passage member forming a passage for gaming balls that do not enter the first ball inlet and flow down; a gaming board on the front side of which the gaming area is formed; and a plate-shaped slide member formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the gaming board and retract into the rear side, and the gaming balls that pass through the passage member can be guided to the second ball inlet by the slide member protruding to the front side of the gaming board.

Here, a gaming machine equipped with a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance is known (for example, JP 2005-013496 A). In this case, a gaming ball that does not enter the first ball entrance does not enter the second ball entrance, but is only collected from the out hole. Therefore, if a gaming ball aimed at the first ball entrance does not enter the first ball entrance, the player cannot have any expectations about the subsequent fate of the gaming ball (the gaming ball flowing down). This has caused a problem in that it is not possible to provide sufficient interest to the player.

In contrast, gaming machine D1 is equipped with a passage member that forms a passage for gaming balls that do not enter the first ball entrance and flow down, a gaming board with a playing area formed on the front side, and a plate-shaped slide member that can protrude to the front side of the gaming board and retract to the rear side, and gaming balls that pass through the passage member can be guided to the second ball entrance by the slide member that protrudes to the front side of the gaming board. Therefore, even if a gaming ball does not enter the first ball entrance, the player can be drawn to the flow of the gaming ball and continue to have hope that the ball will enter the second ball entrance. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the slide member is formed so that it can protrude to the front side of the game board and retract to the rear side, when the slide member is not in use, it can be retracted to the rear side of the game board, thereby securing space on the front side of the game board (expanding the game area). In other words, the area in the game area where the game ball can move can be expanded.

Examples of passage members include those formed as closed passages through which game balls can pass, those formed by one or more nails that determine the direction in which game balls flow, and those formed as inclined surfaces (open passages) along which game balls can roll.

Of course, it is possible for a game ball that has passed through the passage member to enter the second ball entry port even when the slide member is retracted into the back side of the game board. In this case, it is preferable that the ball is easier to enter the second ball entry port when the slide member is protruding than when it is retracted. This is because it draws attention to the state of the slide member, which increases the interest of the game.

A gaming machine D2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine D1, the profit given to the player by the ball entering the second ball entrance is higher than the profit given to the player by the ball entering the first ball entrance.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, gaming machine D2 provides a higher profit to the player when the ball enters the second entrance than when the ball enters the first entrance. This means that even if the gaming ball does not enter the first entrance, the player can have stronger hopes that the gaming ball will enter the second entrance. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Examples of configurations that provide a higher profit to the player include configurations in which more prize balls are paid out when a ball goes in, configurations in which the open time of the movable wing piece that is formed so as to be able to open and close and that allows or restricts the entry of a ball into the third ball entry port by opening and closing is extended, configurations in which the movable wing piece is opened more frequently, and configurations in which the open range of the movable wing piece is increased.

In gaming machine D1 or D2, the passage member has a first opening for receiving gaming balls that do not enter the first ball entrance and flow down, and a second opening for allowing the gaming balls that flow in from the first opening to flow out to the gaming area, and is formed from a light-transmitting material. Gaming machine D3.

According to gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 or D2, the passage member has a first opening that receives gaming balls that do not enter the first ball entrance and flow down, and a second opening that allows the gaming balls that flow in from the first opening to flow out into the game area, and is formed from a light-transmitting material, so that the player can visually see the manner in which the gaming balls that flow in from the first opening flow down (pass) toward the second opening (second ball entrance). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, among gaming machines D1 to D3, a pair of slide members are arranged on either side of the second ball entrance, each of which is inclined downward toward the second ball entrance.

According to gaming machine D4, a pair of slide members are arranged on either side of the second ball inlet, each inclined downward toward the second ball inlet. When the slide members are in a protruding state, it becomes easier for game balls flowing down from either the left or right side of the second ball inlet to enter the second ball inlet. This makes the player more excited about entering the second ball inlet. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, as a configuration for making it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance, a pair of wing members whose base ends are rotatably supported on a rotating shaft protruding from the game board are arranged in the second ball entrance, and when the wing members are opened, the game ball is guided to the second ball entrance (so-called tulips). However, with such a configuration, space is required in the game area for the wing members to rotate (open and close). In particular, space is required above the second ball entrance so that the wing members can assume a closed position. This results in an increase in size in the vertical direction, reducing the space available for arranging other components (for example, the first ball entrance and the liquid crystal display device).

In contrast, gaming machine D4 achieves the same effects as any of gaming machines D1 to D3, and in addition, a pair of plate-shaped slide members that can protrude to the front side of the game board and retract to the rear side are arranged on either side of the second ball entrance in a downwardly inclined position toward the second ball entrance, making it possible to reduce the size in the vertical direction. As a result, it is possible to ensure space for arranging other components (e.g., the first ball entrance and the liquid crystal display device).

Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the second opening of the passage member is disposed above the slide member in the direction of gravity in gaming machine D4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D4, gaming machine D5 has a second opening of the passage member disposed above the sliding member in the direction of gravity, so that the protruding sliding member can be used to make it easier for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entrance. This makes it possible for the player to have stronger expectations for the ball to enter the second ball entrance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine D6 is characterized in that it has two sets of the first ball inlet and the passage member in the gaming machine D5, the second opening of the passage member of one of the two sets is disposed above one of the pair of slide members in the direction of gravity, and the second opening of the passage member of the other set is disposed above the other slide member in the direction of gravity.

Gaming machine D6 has the same effects as gaming machine D5, but also has two sets of first ball inlet and passage members, and the second opening of one of the two sets of passage members is disposed above one of the pair of slide members in the direction of gravity, while the second opening of the other of the two sets of passage members is disposed above the other of the pair of slide members in the direction of gravity. This makes it easier to insert a gaming ball into the second ball inlet by using each of the pair of slide members. This makes it possible to make the player more excited about inserting the ball into the second ball inlet. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

The two sets of first ball inlet and passage member are preferably arranged at a distance on both the left and right sides of the second ball inlet (for example, the second ball inlet is positioned in the widthwise center of the play area, and the two sets are arranged symmetrically in the widthwise direction on either side of the second ball inlet). This is because it makes it easier for game balls flowing down either side of the second starting hole in the widthwise direction of the play area to enter the second ball inlet, and makes the player more excited about entering the ball through the second ball inlet.

Amusement machine D7 is characterized in that in gaming machine D6, the edge of the slide member on the second ball inlet side is located between the lower edge of the second ball inlet in the direction of gravity and the upper edge of the second ball inlet in the direction of gravity.

According to gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D6, the edge of the slide member on the second ball inlet side is located between the edge of the second ball inlet below the direction of gravity and the edge of the second ball inlet above the direction of gravity, so that when a game ball is sent (displaced) in the width direction of the game area, the game ball can be made to abut against the edge of the slide member on the second ball inlet side in the protruding state, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball inlet. In other words, it is possible to prevent a game ball sent (displaced) from one side in the width direction of the game area from passing through the second ball inlet and being sent (displaced) to the other side in the width direction (the game ball escaping in the width direction of the game area without entering the second ball inlet).

Gaming machine D8 is any one of gaming machines D4 to D7, and is characterized in that it has a bottom surface that protrudes from the edge of the second ball entrance below the direction of gravity toward the front side of the gaming board, and the bottom surface is formed with a downward slope toward the second ball entrance.

Gaming machine D8 has the same effects as any of gaming machines D4 to D7, but also has a bottom surface that extends from the edge of the second ball entrance below the direction of gravity toward the front side of the game board, and the bottom surface is formed with a downward incline toward the second ball entrance. This makes it easier for a game ball that does not enter the first ball entrance and flows down (passes through the passage member) to enter the second ball entrance, not only when the sliding member is protruding, but also when the sliding member is retracted. This makes it possible for the player to have stronger expectations about entering the second ball entrance. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Amusement machine D8, characterized in that a ball throwing surface located closer to the second ball entrance and a contact surface connected to the ball throwing surface and located farther from the second ball entrance than the ball throwing surface are formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion, and the angle of the downward inclination of the contact surface toward the second ball entrance is greater than the angle of the downward inclination of the ball throwing surface toward the second ball entrance.

According to gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D8, a ball throwing surface located closer to the second ball entrance and a contact surface connected to the ball throwing surface and located farther from the second ball entrance than the ball throwing part are formed on the upper surface of the bottom part, and the angle of the downward inclination of the contact surface toward the second ball entrance is made larger than the angle of the downward inclination of the ball throwing surface toward the second ball entrance, so that the downward inclination of the contact surface can be used to smoothly enter the second ball entrance. In particular, even when the slide member is retracted, the inclination of the contact surface, which has a large downward inclination, can be used to make it easier for a game ball that does not enter the first ball entrance and flows down (passes through the passage member) to enter the second ball entrance.

A gaming machine D10 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine D3, the first opening of the passage member is located higher in the direction of gravity than the first ball entrance, and the first ball entrance is disposed inside the passage member.

According to gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D3, the first opening of the passage member is located above the first ball inlet in the direction of gravity, and the first ball inlet is disposed inside the passage member, so that some of the game balls that flow into the first opening of the passage member can be made to enter the first ball inlet. In other words, game balls that flow down without entering the first ball inlet can be reliably made to flow into the passage member. As a result, the player's expectations of the ball entering the second ball inlet can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine D11 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D10, and is provided with a detection means for detecting a gaming ball flowing down the passage member and a drive means for driving the slide member, and is characterized in that when a gaming ball is detected by the detection means, the slide member is protruded toward the front side of the gaming board by the drive means.

Gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 to D10, is equipped with a detection means for detecting a gaming ball flowing down the passage member and a drive means for driving the slide member, and when a gaming ball is detected by the detection means, the slide member is driven by the drive means to protrude toward the front side of the gaming board, making it easier for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entrance. Therefore, even if the gaming ball does not enter the first ball entrance, the player can be drawn to the flow of the gaming ball and continue to have hope that the ball will enter the second ball entrance. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

The detection of the game ball by the detection means and the driving by the driving means (projection of the slide member) may be performed simultaneously, or the driving may start a predetermined time after the detection. In the latter case, however, it is preferable that the driving (projection of the slide member) is completed before the game ball reaches the projecting position of the slide member. This is because the function of the slide member to guide the game ball to the second ball entrance (to make it easier to enter the ball) can be reliably performed.

A gaming machine D12 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D4, characterized in that the slide member forms a bottom surface that is connected to the second opening of the passage member.

According to gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D4, the slide member forms a bottom surface (rolling surface) that is connected to the second opening of the passage member, so that the gaming ball can be positioned on the slide member even when the slide member is not protruding (i.e., submerged), and therefore the time that the gaming ball is positioned on the slide member can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the gaming ball that has passed through the passage member to enter the second ball entrance, and the player can have stronger expectations for the ball to enter the second ball entrance. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Gaming machine D13 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D12, a guide portion is formed on the upper surface of the slide member that forms the bottom surface of the passage member, which guides gaming balls located on the upper surface toward the second ball entrance.

According to gaming machine D13, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D12, a guide portion is formed on the upper surface forming the bottom surface of the passage member of the slide member, which guides the game ball located on the upper surface toward the second ball entrance. Therefore, when the slide member is protruded from a state in which the game ball is located on the upper surface of the slide member that has passed through the passage member and is in a submerged state, the game ball can be protruded while being guided toward the second ball entrance by the action of the guide portion, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance.

Examples of the guide portion include a convex stripe or a concave groove (or a combination of these) that extends toward the second ball inlet as it moves toward the tip of the protruding direction of the slide member and is either convex or concave on the top surface. The cross-sectional shape of the convex stripe or the concave groove is arbitrary, and examples include a rectangular cross section, a polygonal cross section, and an arc-shaped cross section (or a cross section that combines these).

<Concept of the invention using the winning port unit 600 as an example>
A gaming machine E1 having a first ball inlet and a second ball inlet located downstream of the first ball inlet in a gaming area, characterized in that it further comprises a passage member which forms a passage for game balls which do not enter the first ball inlet and flow down, and a modification means which makes it easier for game balls to enter the second ball inlet when a first number of game balls pass through the passage member than when a second number of game balls, which is less than the first number, pass through the passage member.

Here, a gaming machine equipped with a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance is known (for example, JP 2005-013496 A). In this case, a gaming ball that does not enter the first ball entrance does not enter the second ball entrance, but is only collected from the out hole. Therefore, if a gaming ball aimed at the first ball entrance does not enter the first ball entrance, the player cannot have any expectations about the subsequent fate of the gaming ball (the gaming ball flowing down). This has caused a problem in that it is not possible to provide sufficient interest to the player.

In contrast, the gaming machine E1 is equipped with a passage member that forms a passage for gaming balls that do not enter the first entrance and flow down, and a change means that makes it easier for gaming balls to enter the second entrance when a first number of gaming balls pass through the passage member than when a second number of gaming balls, which is a number less than the first number, pass through the passage member. Therefore, even if a gaming ball does not enter the first entrance, the player can be drawn to the flow of the gaming balls and continue to have hope that the ball will enter the second entrance. In particular, since the ease of entering the second entrance is changed depending on the number of gaming balls that pass through the passage member, the player can also be drawn to the number of gaming balls that did not enter the first entrance. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Examples of passage members include those formed as closed passages through which game balls can pass, those formed by one or more nails that determine the direction in which game balls flow, and those formed as inclined surfaces (open passages) along which game balls can roll.

The first number is an integer equal to or greater than 1, and the second number is an integer equal to or greater than 2 and is greater than the first number. For example, if the first number is 1, the second number is equal to or greater than 2, and if the first number is 2, the second number is equal to or greater than 3.

A gaming machine E2, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine E1, the profit given to the player by the ball entering the second ball entrance is higher than the profit given to the player by the ball entering the first ball entrance.

A gaming machine E3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1, the profit given to the player when the ball lands in the first ball entrance is higher than the profit given to the player when the ball lands in the second ball entrance.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E1, gaming machine E2 provides a higher profit to a player when the ball enters the second entrance than when the ball enters the first entrance. This means that even if the gaming ball does not enter the first entrance, the player can have stronger hopes that the gaming ball will enter the second entrance. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the profit given to the player by the ball entering the first entrance is higher than the profit given to the player by the ball entering the second entrance. Therefore, although the gaming ball is usually shot at the first entrance, the gaming ball that does not enter the first entrance can be rescued by making it possible for it to enter the second entrance. In particular, when the number of gaming balls passing through the passage member is greater than a predetermined number (when the first number is greater than the second number), it is made easier to enter the second entrance, so that the player can have the conflicting expectations of the ball entering the first entrance and the expectation of the ball not entering the first entrance (i.e., it becomes easier to enter the second entrance). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Examples of configurations that provide a higher profit to the player include configurations in which more prize balls are paid out when a ball goes in, configurations in which the open time of the movable wing piece that is formed so as to be able to open and close and that allows or restricts the entry of a ball into the third ball entry port by opening and closing is extended, configurations in which the movable wing piece is opened more frequently, and configurations in which the open range of the movable wing piece is increased.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the change means includes a restriction means for restricting the flow of a first gaming ball passing through or flowing out of the passage member, and the restriction means is configured to bring the second gaming ball into contact with the first gaming ball whose flow is restricted when the second gaming ball follows the first gaming ball, thereby directing the flow of the second gaming ball toward the second ball entrance. Gaming machine E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the change means includes a restriction means for restricting the flow of the first gaming ball passing through the passage member or flowing out from the passage member, and the restriction means is formed so that when the second gaming ball follows the first gaming ball, the second gaming ball abuts (collides) with the first gaming ball whose flow is restricted, and the flow direction of the second gaming ball is directed toward the second ball entrance, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In other words, it is easier for the first gaming ball to enter the second ball entrance when the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball flow down than when only the first gaming ball flows down (the ease of entering the second ball entrance can be changed depending on the number of gaming balls passing through the passage member), so that the player can also pay attention to the number of gaming balls that have not entered the first ball entrance. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Gaming machine E5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E4, the regulating means is formed as a recess recessed into the wall surface facing the outlet of the passage member.

According to gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine E4, the restricting means is formed as a recess recessed into the wall surface facing the outlet of the passage member, so that the first game ball flowing out from the outlet of the passage member can be received in the recess and the flow of the first game ball can be temporarily restricted (i.e., the first game ball can be temporarily held so that the following second game ball can collide with it), while the restriction on the flow of the first game ball can be released when the first game ball falls out of the recess (flows down) due to its own weight. Therefore, the restriction (holding) and release of the restriction on the flow of the first game ball can be performed only by the shape of the restricting means, and an operating mechanism for switching between them (releasing the restriction) is not required, so the structure can be simplified and the product costs can be reduced.

In addition, according to gaming machine E4, even in a state in which there is no component for guiding the gaming ball flowing out from the exit of the passage member to the second ball inlet (for example, a component having a rolling surface that is inclined downwardly toward the second ball inlet, and which makes it easier for the gaming ball to enter the second ball inlet by rolling the gaming ball on the rolling surface) (the guiding component is formed so as to be displaceable between a position where it can be guided to the second ball inlet and a position where it cannot be guided, and is displaced to the position where it cannot be guided), the second gaming ball can be made to enter the second ball inlet by using the recess.

In gaming machine E5, the outlet of the passage member has a bottom surface along which the gaming ball rolls and side wall surfaces erected opposite both sides of the bottom surface in the width direction, and the distance between the opposing side edge surfaces is set to a dimension approximately equal to the diameter of the gaming ball. Gaming machine E6.

In game machine E6, in addition to the effects of game machine E5, the outlet of the passage member has a bottom surface along which the game ball rolls and side wall surfaces erected opposite both sides of the bottom surface in the width direction, and the distance between the opposing side wall surfaces is set to a dimension approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball, so that the trajectory of the game ball flowing out of the outlet of the passage member can be made approximately constant, and the game ball can be reliably received by the regulating means (recess).

Gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the recess in the gaming machine E5 or E6 is deeper in the direction away from the second ball entrance.

According to gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of gaming machines E5 and E6, the recess is made deeper as it moves away from the second ball entrance, so that a gaming ball received in the recess can be held by shifting its position in the direction in which the recess is made deeper (i.e., the side moving away from the second ball entrance). Therefore, when a second gaming ball abuts (collides with) a first gaming ball held in the recess, the second gaming ball can be directed toward the second ball entrance, making it easier for the second gaming ball to enter the recess.

A gaming machine E8 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines E5 to E7, it is provided with a slide member that is formed so as to be able to retract and protrude, thereby being disposed in a position between the outlet of the passage member and the recess and below the direction of gravity, and that, when protruded, the slide member is formed so as to be able to guide gaming balls to the second ball entrance.

According to gaming machine E8, any of gaming machines E5 to E7 is provided with a slide member that is formed to be able to retract and protrude, and is disposed at a position below the direction of gravity between the outlet of the passage member and the recess, and the slide member is formed to be able to guide the game ball to the second ball entrance when protruded, so that the protruding slide member can be used to cause the first game ball held in the recess to enter the second ball entrance. In other words, when the first game ball falls out of the recess, the first game ball can be received by the slide member, and the slide member can be used to guide the first game ball to the second ball entrance. As a result, the first game ball can be caused to enter the second ball entrance.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the changing means includes a rolling means on which the gaming balls passing through the passage member are rolled, and a path changing means that is interlockingly connected to the rolling means and is formed so as to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, changing the path of the gaming balls passing through the passage member, the path of the gaming ball when the path changing means is displaced to the second position is a path that is easier for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entrance than the path of the gaming ball when the path changing means is displaced to the first position, and when a first number of gaming balls roll on the rolling means, the path changing means is displaced to the second position, and when a second number of gaming balls less than the first number roll on the rolling means, the path changing means is displaced to the first position. Gaming machine E9.

According to gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E1 to E3, the change means includes a rolling means on which gaming balls passing through the passage member are rolled, and a path change means that is interlockingly connected to the rolling means and is formed so as to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and changes the path of the gaming ball passing through the passage member, so that the path of the gaming ball when the path change means is displaced to the second position is a path that is easier for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entrance than the path of the gaming ball when the path change means is displaced to the first position, and when a first number of gaming balls roll on the rolling means, the path change means is displaced to the second position, and when a second number of gaming balls less than the first number roll on the rolling means, the path change means is displaced to the first position, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In other words, it is easier for the balls to enter the second ball entrance when a first number of game balls, which is greater than the second number, flow down than when a second number of game balls flow down (the ease of entering the second ball entrance can be changed depending on the number of game balls passing through the passage member), so the player can also focus on the number of game balls that fail to enter the first ball entrance. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine E10 is characterized in that the course changing means is disposed downstream of the rolling means in the gaming machine E9.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9, since the course change means is arranged downstream of the rolling means, the destination (course) of a given gaming ball can be related to the number and sequence of gaming balls following the given gaming ball, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In other words, when the following gaming balls are in a sequence, the course change means is maintained in the second position while the number of gaming balls rolling on the rolling means is maintained at the first number, making it easier for each gaming ball that has reached the course change means to enter the second ball entrance, while when the sequence of the following gaming balls is broken and the number of gaming balls rolling on the rolling means becomes equal to or less than the second number, the course change means is displaced to the first position, making it more difficult for each gaming ball that has reached the course change means to enter the second ball entrance than in the above-mentioned case (when the course change means is displaced to the second position). This allows the player to focus on the number of balls following and how they are lined up. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the change means includes a rotating member that is formed to be rotatable, a magnet that is disposed on the outer surface of the rotating member and attracts the gaming ball in a hanging state to the outer surface of the rotating member, and a contact means that is positioned on the trajectory of the gaming ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member by the magnet as the rotating member rotates, thereby contacting the gaming ball and causing the gaming ball to fall off the rotating member, and the contact means is positioned lower in the direction of gravity than the gaming ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member, and the gaming ball that falls off the rotating member due to contact with the contact means is more likely to enter the second ball entrance than the gaming ball that is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member and sent. Gaming machine E11.

According to gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E1 to E3, the modification means comprises a rotating member formed to be rotatable, a magnet arranged on the outer surface of the rotating member and attracting the gaming ball in a hanging state to the outer surface of the rotating member, and a contact means which is positioned on the trajectory of the gaming ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member by the magnet as the rotating member rotates, thereby contacting the gaming ball and causing the gaming ball to fall off the rotating member; the contact means is positioned lower in the direction of gravity than the gaming ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member, and the gaming ball that has fallen off the rotating member due to contact with the contact means is more likely to enter the second ball entrance than the gaming ball that is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member and sent, thereby improving the interest of the game. In other words, it is easier for a ball to enter the second ball entrance when one or more balls are attached to the ball attached to the outer surface of the rotating member than when only one ball is attached to the outer surface of the rotating member (the ease of entering the second ball entrance can be changed depending on the number of balls passing through the passage member), so the player can also focus on the number of balls that have not entered the first ball entrance. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, according to the gaming machine E11, even when multiple gaming balls are rolling toward the rotating member, if the gaming balls are connected, the preceding gaming ball is attracted to the rotating member and the following gaming ball is easily attracted to the preceding gaming ball, making it easier for at least the following gaming ball to enter the second ball entrance. On the other hand, if the gaming balls are spaced apart by a predetermined distance, the preceding gaming ball can be attracted to the rotating member, but the following gaming ball cannot be attracted to the preceding gaming ball, and the following gaming ball is also attracted to the rotating member. In other words, it is difficult for both the preceding and following gaming balls to enter the second ball entrance. Therefore, the player can focus not only on the number of gaming balls but also on how they are connected. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, according to the gaming machine E11, the gaming ball is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member in a hanging state, and is sent in this hanging state as the rotating member rotates. Therefore, due to variations in the rolling speed and direction until attraction, and the attraction position, the gaming ball can fall off the rotating member in an unstable state where it swings around aimlessly. In other words, even if only one gaming ball is attracted to the rotating member (if it is not abutting against the abutment means), it is possible to create an effect in which the gaming ball falls off, making it easier to enter the second ball entrance.

Gaming machine E12 is characterized in that the contact means in gaming machine E11 is formed in a tapered flat plate shape and is disposed in a substantially horizontal position at a height position where the tip is inserted into the suction position between the first gaming ball that is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member and the second gaming ball that is attracted to the first gaming ball.

According to gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects of gaming machine E11, the abutment means is formed in a tapered flat plate shape and is arranged in a substantially horizontal position at a height position where its tip is inserted into the suction position between the first gaming ball adsorbed to the outer surface of the rotating member and the second gaming ball adsorbed to the first gaming ball. Therefore, when a first gaming ball is adsorbed to the outer surface of the rotating member and a second gaming ball is adsorbed to the first gaming ball, the adsorption of the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball can be smoothly released, making it easier to drop only the second gaming ball, and when only the first gaming ball is adsorbed to the outer surface of the rotating member, the abutment means is prevented from acting on the first gaming ball, making it easier to maintain the adsorption of the first gaming ball. This makes it possible to more clearly distinguish the difference in the ease of a ball entering the second ball entry hole when only one game ball is attached to the rotating member and hanging down, and when two or more game balls are attached to the rotating member and hanging down in a line. This allows the player to pay more attention to the number of game balls and how they are lined up. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

<Concept of the invention using the variable unit 360 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising a roughly cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with its rotation axis facing horizontally, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts a gaming ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and which sends the attracted gaming ball in the direction of rotation of the rotating member by rotating the rotating member with the gaming ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface, characterized in that the gaming machine F1 comprises a release means that makes it easy to release the attraction between the magnet of the rotating member and the first gaming ball when a first gaming ball is attracted to the magnet of the rotating member and a second gaming ball is magnetically attached to the first gaming ball.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a roughly cylindrical rotating member that is formed to be rotatable with its axis of rotation facing horizontally, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts gaming balls to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and that sends the gaming balls in the direction of rotation of the rotating member by rotating the rotating member with the gaming balls attracted to the outer circumferential surface (for example, JP 2012-231890 A). In this case, when two gaming balls roll in succession toward the rotating member, the leading gaming ball (first gaming ball) is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and when the trailing gaming ball (second gaming ball) is attracted to the leading gaming ball (first gaming ball), both the leading gaming ball and the trailing gaming ball are sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating member. However, such a gaming machine has a problem in that it is not possible to sufficiently provide the player with an interest in the game.

In response to this, gaming machine F1 is equipped with a release means that makes it easier to release the attraction between the magnet of the rotating member and the first gaming ball when a first gaming ball is attracted to the magnet of the rotating member and a second gaming ball is magnetically attached to the first gaming ball, thereby preventing both the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball from being sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating member.

In other words, when only the first game ball rolls toward the rotating member and is attracted to the outer circumferential surface (magnet) of the rotating member, the first game ball can be sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating member, whereas when in addition to the first game ball, a second game ball also rolls toward the rotating member and the first game ball is attracted to the outer circumferential surface (magnet) of the rotating member and the second game ball is attracted to the first game ball, both the first game ball and the second game ball cannot be sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating member. Therefore, when the first game ball rolls toward the rotating member, the player can be made to worry (have his heart pound) that another game ball (i.e., the second game ball) may be rolling behind the first game ball. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine F2, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine F1, a first ball inlet through which a gaming ball that is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member and sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating member enters, and a second ball inlet through which a gaming ball that is not attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member enters, a profit is given to a player when a gaming ball enters at least the first ball inlet, or the profit given to a player by a ball entering the first ball inlet is set to be higher than the profit given to a player by a ball entering the second ball inlet.

Gaming machine F2 has the same effects as gaming machine F1, but also has a first ball entry port through which game balls that are attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member and sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating member can enter, and a second ball entry port through which game balls that are not attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member can enter. When a game ball enters at least the first ball entry port, a profit is awarded to the player, or the profit awarded to the player by the ball entering the first ball entry port is higher than the profit awarded to the player by the ball entering the second ball entry port, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

That is, the player hopes that the game ball will be attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member and sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating member in the hope of obtaining a profit by entering the first ball entrance or obtaining a higher profit than if the ball entered the second ball entrance, and also hopes that more game balls will be attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member and sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating member in the hope of obtaining more opportunities to obtain profits. On the other hand, when only the first game ball is attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, the first game ball can be sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating member (the first ball entrance), while when the second game ball is attracted to the first game ball attracted to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, not only the second game ball but also the first game ball is not sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating member, and both lose the opportunity to enter the first ball entrance. Therefore, when the first game ball rolls toward the rotating member, the player is likely to be concerned (easier to feel nervous) that another game ball (i.e., a second game ball) may be rolling behind the first game ball, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Examples of configurations that provide a higher profit to the player include configurations in which more prize balls are paid out when a ball goes in, configurations in which the open time of the movable wing piece that is formed so as to be able to open and close and that allows or restricts the entry of a ball into the third ball entry port by opening and closing is extended, configurations in which the movable wing piece is opened more frequently, and configurations in which the open range of the movable wing piece is increased.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the release means includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the rotating member, and the displacement member is displaced by contact with the second gaming ball attracted to the first gaming ball, and the displacement increases the distance between the first gaming ball and the magnet. Gaming machine F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 and F2, the release means includes a displacement member that is displaceably arranged on the rotating member, and the displacement member is displaced by contact with the second gaming ball attracted to the first gaming ball, and the displacement increases the distance between the first gaming ball and the magnet. Therefore, when the second gaming ball is attracted to the first gaming ball, the weight of the second gaming ball is used to release the attraction between the magnet and the first gaming ball, while when the second gaming ball is not attracted to the first gaming ball, the attraction between the magnet and the first gaming ball is not released. Moreover, since such switching is performed using the weight of the second gaming ball, it is not necessary to provide a drive source for displacing the displacement member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The distance between the first game ball and the magnet can be increased by displacing the displacement member in any of the following ways: only the first game ball is displaced, only the magnet is displaced, or both the first game ball and the magnet are displaced.

Gaming machine F4 is characterized in that in gaming machine F1 or F2, the release means is recessed into the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member and is formed as a recess that receives the second gaming ball that has been attracted to the first gaming ball.

According to gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of gaming machines F1 and F2, the release means is recessed into the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member and is formed as a recess for receiving the second gaming ball attracted to the first gaming ball, so that the second gaming ball can be brought closer to the lower side of the first gaming ball in the direction of gravity, which makes it easier to increase the gravity direction component of the weight of the second gaming ball acting on the first gaming ball. This makes it easier to release the attraction between the first gaming ball and the magnet.

In other words, when a second game ball is attracted to a first game ball, the weight of the second game ball is used to release the attraction between the magnet and the first game ball, whereas when the second game ball is not attracted to the first game ball, the attraction between the magnet and the first game ball is not released. Furthermore, since such switching can be achieved by using only a recess recessed into the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member as a means of utilizing the weight of the second game ball, it is not necessary to provide a displacement member or a drive source, and accordingly, product costs can be reduced.

Gaming machine K1 is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, D1 to D13, E1 to 12, and F1 to F4. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop being a specific identification information as a necessary condition." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, D1 to D13, E1 to 12, and F1 to F4, the gaming machine K2 is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, which is operated to launch a ball into a predetermined gaming area, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, as a necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card) according to the number of winning balls is given.

Gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, D1 to D13, E1 to 12, and F1 to F4. Among them, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine having a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information as a necessary condition, using balls as a gaming medium, and requiring a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."
＜Other＞
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a gaming machine which includes a roughly cylindrical rotating member which is rotatably formed with its rotation axis facing horizontally, and a magnet which is disposed on the rotating member and attracts gaming balls to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member, and which rotates the rotating member with the gaming balls attracted to the outer circumferential surface, thereby sending the gaming balls in the direction of rotation of the rotating member (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-231890 A).
However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem in that it is difficult for the gaming ball to be attracted.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can easily attract gaming balls.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises a roughly cylindrical rotating member that is rotatably formed with its rotation axis facing horizontally, and a magnet that is arranged on the rotating member and attracts a gaming ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and when the rotating member is rotated with the gaming ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface, the attracted gaming ball is sent in the rotation direction of the rotating member, and a rolling surface is arranged juxtaposed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and rolls the gaming ball in a direction roughly parallel to the direction of the rotation axis of the rotating member, and the magnet is arranged at least at an attraction position where the gaming ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and an upstream position that is upstream of the rolling surface from the attraction position.
The gaming machine according to Technical Concept 2 is the gaming machine according to Technical Concept 1, wherein the rotating member has a recess formed in its outer circumferential surface and serves as the attraction position.
A gaming machine of technical idea 3 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, in which at least a portion of the magnet arranged in the upstream position is arranged forward in the rotational direction of the rotating member than the portion arranged in the attraction position.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 1, it is possible to easily attract gaming balls.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 1, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines described in Technical Concept 1 or 2, it is possible to make it easier to attract gaming balls.
<Code>
10 Pachinko Machine (Amusement Machine)
13 Game Board
26 Left starting entry hole (first entry hole)
27 Right starting entry hole (first entry hole)
331a receiving part (rolling member)
352 Variable plate (displacement member)
352d1 bulging part (plate thickness part)
353d first irregular reflection portion (first transparent member)
353f standing portion (connecting member)
354b: second irregular reflection section (second transparent member)
355 Light-emitting member (base member)
355a LED (light emitting means)
369 Stopper portion (cutting means)
370L, 2370L, 3370L, 4370L, 5370L Rotating body (rotating member)
370R, 2370R, 3370R, 4370R, 5370R Rotating body (rotating member)
372Rb, 2372Rb magnet
372Lc2, 2372Lc, 3372Lc, 5372Lc Groove (recess)
372Rc2, 2372Rc, 3372Rc, 5372Rc Groove (recess)
4372Rc5 recessed portion (recess)
5372Rd, 5372Ld Release member (displacement member)
373Ra, 373La collection port (second ball entry port)
381c second rolling part (rolling surface)
381d third rolling portion (receiving portion)
2381g partition wall
382 V winning part (first ball entry)
613a Guide plate (bottom surface)
613a1 contact surface
613a2 rolling surface (throwing surface)
7613e Through hole (recess)
631b second through hole (first opening)
632a through hole (second ball inlet)
632b connection hole (second opening)
633b second through hole (first opening)
640, 8640 , 9640, 11640 Path members (passage members)
10642a Tip (contact member)
8644a Variable plate (rolling means)
8644c Regulating member (path changing means)
652 Variable plate (slide member)
11652a Recess (Guide)
655 Solenoid (driving means)
SE1 sensor device (detection member)

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
13 Game board 26 Left start winning hole (first winning hole)
27 Right starting entry hole (first entry hole)
71 Outer hole (specific entry area )
6 30, 11630 Base plate (path forming means)
631b Second through hole (receiving part)
632a Through hole (second ball inlet)
632b, 11632b Connection hole (outflow part )
6 33b Second through hole (receiving part)
640, 11640 Path member (path forming means)
652, 11652 Variable plate (guiding member)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having a first ball inlet and a second ball inlet disposed downstream of the first ball inlet in a gaming area,
A path forming means for forming a path through which game balls that do not enter the first ball entrance and flow down can flow;
A game board on which the game area is formed on the front side;
A plate-like guide member is provided that is capable of protruding toward the front side of the game board and retracting from the front side,
The path forming means includes a receiving section for receiving game balls that do not enter the first ball entrance and flow down, and an outflow section for causing the game balls that have flowed in from the receiving section to flow out from the path, and is formed from a light-transmitting material;
The receiving portion is disposed upstream of the guide member,
The game ball flowing down the path is guided by the guide member protruding toward the front side of the game board, and is allowed to enter the second ball entrance after flowing out of the outlet portion,
The second ball inlet is disposed closer to the horizontal center of the game area than the first ball inlet when viewed from the front,
The gaming machine is characterized in that at least a portion of a specific ball entry area is formed so as to overlap with at least a portion of the guide member below the guide member in the direction of gravity when viewed from the front.

Images